WO2009012482A2 - 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds - Google Patents

5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009012482A2
WO2009012482A2 PCT/US2008/070613 US2008070613W WO2009012482A2 WO 2009012482 A2 WO2009012482 A2 WO 2009012482A2 US 2008070613 W US2008070613 W US 2008070613W WO 2009012482 A2 WO2009012482 A2 WO 2009012482A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
mono
amino
compound
aminosulfonyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2008/070613
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2009012482A3 (en
Inventor
Hongbin Li
Jun Yuan
Rajagopal Bakthavatchalam
Kevin J. Hodgetts
Scott M. Capitosti
Jianmin Mao
David J. Wustrow
Qin Guo
Original Assignee
H.Lundbeck A/S
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to PL08796352T priority Critical patent/PL2178865T3/en
Priority to CA2691507A priority patent/CA2691507C/en
Priority to RS20150681A priority patent/RS54303B1/en
Priority to JP2010517200A priority patent/JP2010533736A/en
Priority to UAA200913338A priority patent/UA105758C2/en
Priority to DK08796352.6T priority patent/DK2178865T3/en
Priority to US12/669,308 priority patent/US20100292236A1/en
Priority to KR1020157026989A priority patent/KR20150118197A/en
Priority to MX2009014159A priority patent/MX2009014159A/en
Priority to CN200880021346.2A priority patent/CN101711245B/en
Priority to ES08796352.6T priority patent/ES2551095T3/en
Priority to AU2008275891A priority patent/AU2008275891B2/en
Application filed by H.Lundbeck A/S filed Critical H.Lundbeck A/S
Priority to EA200971084A priority patent/EA017250B1/en
Priority to NZ582057A priority patent/NZ582057A/en
Priority to BRPI0813426-0A2A priority patent/BRPI0813426A2/en
Priority to SI200831516T priority patent/SI2178865T1/en
Priority to EP08796352.6A priority patent/EP2178865B1/en
Publication of WO2009012482A2 publication Critical patent/WO2009012482A2/en
Publication of WO2009012482A3 publication Critical patent/WO2009012482A3/en
Priority to ZA2009/08447A priority patent/ZA200908447B/en
Priority to IL202499A priority patent/IL202499A/en
Priority to HK10108934.0A priority patent/HK1142330A1/en
Priority to PH12014501677A priority patent/PH12014501677B1/en
Priority to US14/480,979 priority patent/US9133204B2/en
Priority to HRP20151052TT priority patent/HRP20151052T1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/08—Bronchodilators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02—Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/06—Antigout agents, e.g. antihyperuricemic or uricosuric agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06—Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D231/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings
    • C07D231/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D231/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D231/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D277/56—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D333/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D333/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D333/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings not substituted on the ring sulphur atom
    • C07D333/26—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings not substituted on the ring sulphur atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D333/38—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds that have useful pharmacological properties.
  • the invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treating conditions related to P2X 7 receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to P2X 7 receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of P2X 7 receptors.
  • nociceptors A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
  • Neuropathic pain which typically results from damage to the nervous system, involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, pain from a normally innocuous stimulus (allodynia) and increased pain from a normally painful stimulus (hyperalgesia). In most instances, neuropathic pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating than the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
  • neuropathic pain is generally suboptimal.
  • Opiates such as morphine
  • morphine are potent analgesics, but their usefulness is limited because of adverse side effects, such as physical addictiveness and withdrawal properties, as well as respiratory depression, mood changes, and decreased intestinal motility with concomitant constipation, nausea, vomiting, and alterations in the endocrine and autonomic nervous systems.
  • neuropathic pain is frequently non-responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens, or to treatment with other drugs, such as gabapentin.
  • Treatments employing the N-methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)- adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects.
  • Transient inflammation is a beneficial mechanism that protects mammals from invading pathogens. Uncontrolled inflammation, however, causes tissue damage and pain and is the underlying cause of many illnesses, including asthma, as well as other allergic, infectious, autoimmune, degenerative, and idiopathic diseases. Existing treatments often exhibit low, delayed or only temporary efficacy, undesirable side-effects and/or a lack of selectivity.
  • new drugs that overcome one or more of the shortcomings of drugs currently used for immunosuppression or in the treatment or prevention of inflammatory disorders, including allergic disorders, autoimmune disorders, fibrogenic disorders, and neurodegenerative diseases, such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease, and Huntington's disease.
  • the P2X 7 receptor is a ligand-gated ion channel that is activated by ATP and is present on a variety of cell types, including microglia in the central nervous system and cells involved in inflammation and immune system function, such as immune cells.
  • P2X 7 is involved in activation of lymphocytes and monocyte/macrophages leading to the increased release of pro-inflammatory cytokines (e.g., TNFalpha and IL-lbeta) from these cells.
  • pro-inflammatory cytokines e.g., TNFalpha and IL-lbeta
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists may find use in the treatment and prophylaxis of pain, including acute, chronic and neuropathic pain, as well as a variety of other conditions including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis).
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A:
  • Formula A as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates), amides and esters of such compounds.
  • Formula A represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring;
  • X is absent or C 1 -C 6 alkylene that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) hydroxy and -COOH; (ii) C 1 - C 8 alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, mono- or di-
  • C 4 alkyl mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
  • Y is C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 3 -C 16 cycloalkyl, 4- to 16-membered heterocycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or (5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 - C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -
  • R 2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C
  • each R 4 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and R A is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L is absent or C 1 - C 6 alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon- carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, which alkylene is optionally substituted with oxo, -COOH, -SO 3 H, -SO 2 NH 2 , -PO 3 H 2 , tetrazole or oxadiazolone; A is absent or CO, O, NR 6 , S, SO, SO 2 , CONR 6 , NR 6 CO, (C 4 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2
  • C 6 alkanoylamino mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula I:
  • Y is C 4 -C 12 cycloalkyl that is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C 1 - C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 - C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl and mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl; R 2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino,
  • C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 - C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 - C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyla
  • R A is not unsubstituted benzyl
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula EH:
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are independently N, NH, CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 is chosen from O and S; W, R 2 and R 4 are as described for Formula A;
  • V is C 1 -C 6 alkylene that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) C 1 -C 4 alkyl, (C 3 -Cscycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl and phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl; (ii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring; and (iii) substituents that are taken together with R 4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
  • Y is C 3 -C 16 cycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 - C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 - C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C
  • each R 5 is independently hydrogen, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -
  • both R 5 moieties are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl;
  • R A is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L is as described for Formula A; A is absent or CO, O, NR 6 , S, SO, SO 2 , CONR 6 , (C 4 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; wherein R 6 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; and M is a (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 - C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula IV or Formula V:
  • Formula IV Formula V as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates), amides and esters of such compounds.
  • X is C 2 -C 6 alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
  • Y is C 3 -C 16 cycloalkyl, phenyl or 6- to 10-membered heterocycle, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -
  • R A comprises a ring and has the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L and A are as described for Formula A; and
  • Formula VI as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates), amides and esters of such compounds.
  • W and X and each R 4 are as described for Formula A;
  • Y is Q-C 1 gcycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 - C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, (C 3 -
  • R 3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether or (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl; and R A is phenylC 0 -C 4
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula VII:
  • Formula VII or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein: represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ri .ng; such that is not furan, lH-pyrrole or isoxazole;
  • V is absent or C 1 -C 5 alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl,
  • C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl and phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl; (ii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a
  • each R 5 is independently (i) -COOH; (ii) (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 2 - C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl and phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl; or (iii) taken together with another R 5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C 1 -C 6 cycloalkyl or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii) or (
  • R A is not methyl, acetyl or trifluoroethanone;
  • thiophene is thiophene
  • R A is not benzyl or 4-methylbenzyl; and (iv) if is thiazole, then R A is not unsubstituted phenyl, unsubstituted pyridin-2-yl, unsubstituted thiophen-2-yl, unsubstituted thiophen-3-yl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 3,4- dimethoxyphenyl or 4-(p-tolyloxymethyl).
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula VIII:
  • R 3 is halogen, cyano, C 3 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; and
  • R A is phenylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 4 alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C,-C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 - C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoy
  • the present invention provides 5 -membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula IX:
  • R A is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein L, A and M are as described for Formula A;
  • R A is not methyl; and (ii) if — is thiazole, then R A is not unsubstituted phenyl or unsubstituted thiophen-3-yl.
  • 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A or I-IX, as well as other Formula(s) provided herein are P2X 7 receptor antagonists and exhibit an IC 50 value of no greater than 20 micromolar, 10 micromolar, 5 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, or 100 nanomolar in an in vitro assay for determination of P2X 7 receptor antagonist activity, hi certain embodiments, such P2X 7 receptor antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of P2X 7 receptor activity (i.e., within an assay provided in Example 4, herein) at a concentration equal to the IC 50 , 10 times the IC 50 or 100 times the IC 5O and/or at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
  • 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • a detectable marker e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated
  • the present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one 5-membered heterocyclic amides or related compound provided herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • methods for modulating (e.g., reducing) cellular P2X 7 receptor activation or activity, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., microglia, astrocyte or peripheral macrophage or monocyte) that expresses a P2X 7 receptor with at least one P2X 7 receptor modulator as described herein.
  • a cell e.g., microglia, astrocyte or peripheral macrophage or monocyte
  • P2X 7 receptor modulator as described herein.
  • Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of P2X 7 receptor modulator that is sufficient to detectably alter P2X 7 receptor activity in vitro (as determined using an assay provided in Example 4).
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • methods for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) pain a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • methods for treating inflammation in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) inflammation a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for treating neurological and/or neurodegenerative disorders, cardiovascular disorders, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, ocular conditions (e.g., glaucoma), cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, or fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis) in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) one or more of the foregoing conditions a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • the present invention provides methods for inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein. Also provided herein are methods for promoting weight loss in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist such as, but not limited to, a P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to P2X 7 receptor, comprising: (a) contacting P2X 7 receptor with a labeled compound that is a 5-membered heterocyclic amides or related compound as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to P2X 7 receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled compound; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled compound with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
  • the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of P2X 7 receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a compound as described herein under conditions that permit modulation by the compound of
  • P2X 7 receptor activity (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound modulating P2X 7 receptor activity.
  • the present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation, such as pain, inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder, osteoarthritis rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and/or fibrosis of internal organs such as interstitial fibrosis.
  • P2X 7 receptor modulation such as pain, inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder, osteoarthritis rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and/or fibrosis of internal organs such as inter
  • the present invention provides methods for preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds. Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate P2X 7 receptor activity in a variety of contexts.
  • 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds encompasses all compounds of Formula A, I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII and/or DC, as well as compounds of other Formulas provided herein (including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, amides and esters of such compounds.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication.
  • Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids.
  • Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2-acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbromide, methylnitrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate, pantothenate, phenylacetate
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile
  • prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas are provided herein.
  • a "prodrug” is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound a formula provided herein.
  • a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein.
  • Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate, benzoate and peptide derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon.
  • Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (C 1 - C 8 alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 6 alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl.
  • C 0 -C n alkyl refers to a single covalent bond (C 0 ) or an alkyl group having from 1 to n carbon atoms; for example "C 0 -C 4 alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkyl group. In some instances, a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated. For example, “hydroxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one -OH; “aminoalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one -NH 2 .
  • Alkenyl refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, C 2 - C 6 alkenyl and C 2 -C 4 alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. "Alkynyl” refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond.
  • Alkynyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl and C 2 - C 4 alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above.
  • C 1 -C 2 alkylene is methylene or ethylene;
  • C 0 -C 4 alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or carbon atoms;
  • C 0 -C 2 alkylene is a single covalent bond, methylene or ethylene.
  • a "C 1 -C 6 alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond” is a C 1 -C 6 alkylene group as described above, or a divalent C 2 -C 6 alkene or C 2 -C 6 alkyne.
  • a “cycloalkyl” is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, mertanyl, and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl, in which the cycloalkyl group contains a single ring having from 3 to 7 ring members, all of which are carbon.
  • a "(C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyr' is a C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • cycloalkyl groups are described herein as resulting from two substituents (e.g., R 5 moieties) being taken together, along with any intervening atoms.
  • Intervening atoms in this context are any atoms that appear in the chain of covalently bonded atoms linking the two substituents. If the two substituents are attached to the same carbon atom, then the carbon atom to which they are attached is the only intervening atom. If the two substituents are attached to different atoms (typically carbon or nitrogen), then the atoms to which they are attached are intervening atoms, as are additional atoms (if any) that are needed to complete the chain of covalent linkages between the two substituents.
  • a "(C 4 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkylene” is a divalent (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties, hi general, one such single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both such single covalent bonds are located on different ring members.
  • one a (C 6 cycloalkyl)C 2 alkylene moiety is:
  • alkoxy is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • Alkoxy groups include C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and C 1 -C 4 alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge
  • alkenylthio refers to an alkenyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge
  • Alkanoyl groups have the indicated number of carbon atoms, with the carbon of the keto group being included in the numbered carbon atoms.
  • Alkanoyl groups include, for example, C 1 -Cgalkanoyl, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl and C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Alkyl ether refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group).
  • Alkyl ether groups include C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether and C 2 -C 4 alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a C 2 alkyl ether has the structure -CH 2 -O-CH 3 .
  • Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 and C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group (i.e., the carbon of the keto bridge is not included in the indicated number of carbon atoms).
  • Alkanoyloxy groups include C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 and C 1 -C 4 alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group.
  • C 1 alkanoyloxy refers to -0-C(O)-CH 3 .
  • Alkanoylamino groups include C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 and C 1 - C 4 alkanoylamino groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms within the alkanoyl group, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group.
  • Alkylsulfonyl refers to groups of the formula -(SO 2 )-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C 1 -Q,alkylsulfonyl and C 1 - C 4 alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonyl is one representative alkylsulfonyl group.
  • C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylC 0 -C 4 alkyl is a C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl moiety that is linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkylne group.
  • C 1 -C 4 haloalkylsulfonyl is an alkylsulfonyl group that has from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl).
  • C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyloxy refers to a C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl moiety that is linked via an oxygen bridge.
  • Alkylsulfonylamino refers to groups of the formula -N(R)-(SO 2 )-alkyl, in which R is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl and the nitrogen atom is the point of attachment.
  • Alkylsulfonylamino groups include C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino and C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonylamino groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Methylsulfonylamino is a representative alkylsulfonylamino group.
  • C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylaminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl is a C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonylamino moiety linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • C 1 -C 6 haloalkylsulfonylamino is an alkylsulfonylamino group that has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonylamino).
  • Aminosulfonyl refers to groups of the formula -(SO 2 )-NH 2 , in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment.
  • the term “mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl” refers to groups that satisfy the formula -(SO 2 )-NR 2 , in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, and in which one R is C 1 -C 6 alkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • Alkylaminoalkyl refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene-N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups.
  • alkylene group i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene-N(alkyl)(alkyl)
  • Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)aminoC 1 - C 8 alkyl, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 6 alkyl and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 1 - C 6 alkyl.
  • "Mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 6 alkyl” refers to a mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 6 alkylene group.
  • alkyl as used in the terms “alkylamino” and “alkylaminoalkyl” differs from the definition of "alkyl” used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 - C 6 alkyl).
  • aminosulfonyl refers to a sulfonamide group (i.e., -(SO 2 )NH 2 ).
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)aminosulfonyl” refers to groups of the formula -(SO 2 )-N(R) 2 , in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, one R is C 1 -C 8 alkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen C 1 -C 8 alkyl.
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonylC 0 -C 4 alkyl” is an aminosulfonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with C 1 -C 6 alkyl, and which is linked via a single covalent bond (i.e., mono- or di-(C 1 -C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl) or a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group (i.e., -(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-(SO 2 )N(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) 2 ). If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the C,- C 6 alkyl groups may be the same or different.
  • halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • haloalkyl is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., "C 1 -Cehaloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta- chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l-trifluoromethyl-ethyl.
  • Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl.
  • haloalkoxy refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via an oxygen bridge.
  • a dash (“-") that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, -CONH 2 is attached through the carbon atom.
  • a “carbocycle” or “carbocyclic group” comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocycle), and does not contain a heterocycle. Unless otherwise specified, each ring within a carbocycle may be independently saturated, partially saturated or aromatic, and is optionally substituted as indicated.
  • a carbocycle generally has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings and optionally further contains one or more alkylene bridges; carbocycles within certain embodiments have one ring or two fused rings. Typically, each ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C 3 -C 8 ); C 5 -C 7 rings are recited in certain embodiments.
  • Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 16 ring members.
  • Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl as described above (e.g., cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or adamantly).
  • Other carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring, with or without one or more additional aromatic and/or cycloalkyl rings).
  • Such aryl carbocycles include, for example, phenyl, naphthyl (e.g., 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl), fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphthyl.
  • Certain carbocycles recited herein are phenyl groups linked via a single covalent bond or C 1 -C 2 alkylene group (e.g., benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl), and are designated phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl.
  • a "heterocycle” or “heterocyclic group” has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic.
  • a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocycle has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring.
  • Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members.
  • Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO 2 .
  • a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated), such as a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, which generally comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 ring atoms that are independently chosen from C, O, N and S; or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic), such as a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl (which may be monocyclic or bicyclic) or a 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., pyridyl or pyrimidyl).
  • N- linked heterocyclic groups are linked via a component nitrogen atom.
  • a “heterocycleC 0 -C 4 alkyl” is a heterocyclic group linked via a single covalent bond or C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • a “(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 1 -C 4 alkyl” is a heterocycloalkyl ring with from 4 to 7 ring members that is linked via a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • a "(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkylene” is a divalent (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties.
  • one such single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both such single covalent bonds are located on different ring members.
  • R A if L is a (piperidinyl)C 2 alkylene, A is absent and M is -COOH, one R A moiety so formed is:
  • a “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest.
  • a ring substituent may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member.
  • Substituents of aromatic groups are generally covalently bonded to a ring carbon atom.
  • substitution refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are "optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different).
  • Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of possible substituents.
  • Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents).
  • Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent (e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents).
  • P2X 7 receptor refers to any P2X7 receptor, preferably a mammalian receptor such as the human or rat P2X7 receptor disclosed in US Patent No. 6,133,434, as well as homologues thereof found in other species.
  • P2X 7 receptor modulator also referred to herein as a “modulator,” is a compound that modulates P2X 7 receptor activation and/or P2X 7 receptor-mediated activity (e.g., signal transduction).
  • P2X 7 receptor modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula A and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and esters thereof.
  • a modulator may be a P2X 7 receptor agonist or antagonist.
  • a modulator is considered an "antagonist" if it detectably inhibits P2X 7 receptor- mediated signal transduction (using, for example, a representative assay provided in Example 4); in general, such an antagonist inhibits P2X 7 receptor activation with a IC 50 value of less than 20 micromolar, preferably less than 10 micromolar, more preferably less than 5 micromolar, more preferably less than 1 micromolar, still more preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and most preferably less than 100 nanomolar within an assay provided in Example 4.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • An "inverse agonist" of P2X 7 receptor is a compound that reduces the activity of
  • P2X 7 receptor below its basal activity level in the absence of added ligand. Inverse agonists of P2X 7 receptor may also inhibit the activity of ligand at P2X 7 receptor and/or binding of ligand to P2X 7 receptor.
  • the basal activity of P2X 7 receptor, as well as a reduction in P2X 7 receptor activity due to the presence of P2X 7 receptor antagonist, may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay (e.g., the assay of Example 4).
  • a "neutral antagonist" of P2X 7 receptor is a compound that inhibits the activity of ligand at P2X 7 receptor, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 4 performed in the absence of ligand, P2X 7 receptor activity is reduced by no more than 10%, preferably by no more than 5%, and more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity).
  • Neutral antagonists of P2X 7 receptor may inhibit the binding of ligand to P2X 7 receptor.
  • P2X 7 receptor agonist is a compound that elevates the activity of the P2X 7 receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances P2X 7 receptor activation and/or P2X 7 receptor-mediated activity, such as signal transduction).
  • P2X 7 receptor agonist activity may be detected using the representative assay provided in Example 4.
  • P2X 7 receptor agonists include ATP and 2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'- triphosephate (BzATP).
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from at least one condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain.
  • a therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 4). It will be apparent that the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
  • statically significant results varying from control at the p ⁇ 0.1 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • a "patient” is any individual treated with a compound provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to
  • P2X 7 receptor modulation or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered at risk for the development of such symptoms).
  • the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A and other formulas recited herein.
  • modulators that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation, such as pain.
  • Such modulators are also useful as probes for detection and localization of P2X 7 receptor and as standards in P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction assays.
  • Ri represents from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -
  • Formula Ha Formula lib Formula lie wherein variables are as described above.
  • X is not absent (e.g., C 1 -Csalkylene, optionally substituted as described above).
  • the heteroaryl core represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring that is substituted with exactly one substituent R A and is optionally substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents represented by R 2 .
  • R 2 in certain embodiments, represents zero substituents or 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl and C 1 - C f jhaloalkyl.
  • Representative subformulas of Formulas A, I and Ila-c include, for example:
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -Cgalkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -
  • C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C 1 -C 6 alkyl)sulfonylamino; Z], Z 2 and Z 3 are independently N, NH,
  • Z 6 may be substituted with a substituent represented by R A or R 2 , and that such substitution will result in the replacement of the hydrogen atom with a substituent represented by R A or
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • R A is phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, (5- or 6- membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -
  • C 6 alkylamino)C 0 -C 4 alkyl C 1 -Cealkylsulfonyl, C 1 -Cealkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- (C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 4 alkyl and C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • T is not O and R A is not unsubstituted benzyl.
  • R A is phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 - C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted as described above, such that R A is not unsubstituted benzyl.
  • R A moieties include, for example, (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 - C 6 alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfon
  • R A is C 3 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 - C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkenylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 - C 6 alkoxycarbonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C 1 -C 6 alkylaminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 arkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl or (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl
  • R A is not optionally substituted alkoxy.
  • R A is C 3 - C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C 1
  • R A moieties include, for example, C 3 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, and mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkanoylamino, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -Coalkylsulfonyloxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
  • R A is: (i) C 3 -C 6 alkyl that is substituted with amino, hydroxy or -COOH; or (ii) mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)ammoC 0 -C 2 alkyl that is substituted with from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, amino, - COOH and C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonylamino.
  • R A is a group of the formula: wherein:
  • L is absent or C 1 -C 6 alkylene that is optionally substituted with oxo; represents a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally fused to phenyl or to a 6-membered heteroaryl;
  • R 7 represents from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
  • R A moieties satisfy the formula: wherein: G is CH or N; s and t are independently O, 1, 2, 3 or 4, such that the sum of s and t ranges from 2 to 5; and Rg is: (i) hydrogen, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonylaminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, or 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, amino
  • R 9 is: (i) C 1 -C 6 alkyl that is substituted with -COOH; or (ii) a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl that is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 oxo; and Ri 0 represents one substituent chosen from: (i) -COOH; (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl that is substituted with -COOH; (iii) mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 2 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl and C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino; each of which is substituted with from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo and -COOH; and (iv) C 1 -Cehaloalkylsulfonylamino.
  • R 2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl and
  • X is methylene or ethylene, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from C 1 -C 4 alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl and substituents that are taken together, with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • Y is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 1 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino; and/or
  • Ri represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -Qhaloalkoxy, (C 3 - C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, and mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino; and each R 5 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl or phenyl; or two R 5 are taken together with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound to form a C 3 - Cgcycloalkyl.
  • Representative subformulas of Formula III include, for example:
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -Qalkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono-
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C 1 ⁇ alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • R A is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C 1 - C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -Qhydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkenylthio, C 2 -Cealkyl ether, (mono- or di-C 1 -C6alkylamino)C
  • R A groups include (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyL C 1 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 - C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -Qalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminos
  • R 2 represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C 1 -Cealkyl and C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl;
  • V is methylene or ethylene, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from C 1 -C 4 alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl and substituents that are taken together, with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • Y is C 3 -C 16 cycloalkyl, 6- to 10-membered aryl or 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -
  • Y is phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; each of which is optionally fused to a 5- to
  • phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl e.g., pyridyl, pyrazolyl or pyrimidinyl
  • J and K are independently CH or N;
  • Ri represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -
  • Each R 5 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R 5 are taken together with the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C 3 - Cgcycloalkyl; and
  • Each R 5a is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R 5a are taken together with the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C 3 - C 8 cycloalkyl.
  • R 1 the carbon atom at that ring position may optionally be substituted with a substituent represented by R 1 .
  • substituents represented by Ri may be present at any of positions 2-6 of the resulting phenyl moiety (with position 1 being the point of attachment to C(R 5 )(R 5 )).
  • Representative subformulas of Formula III include, for example:
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 - C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 - C 6 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, or mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)amino.
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • Representative subformulas of Formulas IV and V include, for example:
  • each R 3 is as described above.
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 - Qaminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, (C 3 - C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, or mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino.
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • R A is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, d-C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 - Cealkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - Cealkylsulfon
  • the (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl (which is unsubstituted or substituted as described above) is thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl or pyridazinyl.
  • Y is phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 - C 6 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, mono- or di-
  • J and K are independently CH or N;
  • Ri represents from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, and mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)amino; and each R 5 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyL, C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, or taken together with another R 5 attached to the same carbon atom, and the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a Cs-Cgcycloalky
  • R A is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, Q-C 6 alkenyl, C 1 - Qhaloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haIoalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C ⁇ alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C
  • At least one R 5 is not hydrogen (e.g., both R 5 are taken together with the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C 3 -Cgcycloalkyl).
  • R 3 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 - C 4 haloalkyl.
  • J and K are independently CH or N;
  • Ri represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, and mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)amino; and each R 5 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl or phenyl; or taken together with another R 5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl.
  • R A is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino and halogen; and (ii) C 1 -Q,alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl and C 1 -C ⁇ aloalkyl
  • R A is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino and halogen; and (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -Q,haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 - C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl and C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • J and K are independently CH or N;
  • Ri represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 - C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, (C 3 -Cvcycloalkyl)C 0 - C 4 alkyl, and mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl;
  • Each R 5 is independently (i) hydrogen; (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl, 4- to
  • R A is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) 0x0, amino and halogen; and (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C,-C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 - C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C 1 - C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl and C 1 -
  • one R 5 moiety is a N-linked 5- or 6-membered heterocycloalkyl group (e.g., piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperidinyl or pyrrolidinyl), each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with one substituent such as hydroxy, halogen, aminocarbonyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • V is absent or methylene.
  • compounds of Formula VII represents pyrazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole or thiophene.
  • Certain compounds of Formula VII further satisfy the formula: wherein Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are independently N, NH, CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 is chosen from O and S. Certain such compounds satisfy one or more of the following formulas:
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -Cehaloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - Qalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or
  • Z 4 and Z 5 are independently CH, N, NH, O or S; and Z 6 is CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z 4 , Z 5 and Z 6 is chosen from O and S. Certain such compounds further satisfy the formula: ; wherein R 3 is as described above.
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • R A is as described above, or R A is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 - Qalkenyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkenylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 - C 6 alkoxycarbonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C 1 - Cealkylaminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)
  • R A is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, d-C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -Cgalkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, 4- to 7-member
  • Rn and Ri 2 are taken together, with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- (C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4-
  • R 5 moieties are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to fo ⁇ n a C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl.
  • R 3 is halogen, cyano, C 1 -C ⁇ aloalkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; and/or Y is piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • Y is piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • Ri 3 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • R A is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl and C 1 -C 4 halo
  • R A is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl and C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl.
  • each R 3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 - C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C ⁇ alkylsulfonyl, C 1 - C 6 alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl,
  • R A moieties include, for example, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C 1 - C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, d-C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 6 alkylthio, C 2 -C 6 alkenylthio,
  • Y groups include, for example, ; in which J and K are independently CH or
  • Ri represents from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, d-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 - C 4 alkyl, and mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino.
  • Representative 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 1-3. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In addition, other forms such as hydrates and prodrugs of such compounds are specifically contemplated by the present invention.
  • 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds provided herein detectably alter (modulate) P2X 7 receptor activity, as determined using an assay such as an assay recited in Example 4, herein. Additional assays that may be used for this purpose include assays that measure IL- l ⁇ release; assays that measure uptake of a membrane-impermeant fluorescent dye such as YO-PROl; assays that measure lucifer yellow uptake; assays that measure ethidium bromide uptake; and assays that use calcium imaging to detect P2X 7 activity; all of which assays are well known in the art. Certain modulators provided herein detectably modulate P2X 7 receptor activity at micromolar concentrations, at nanomolar concentrations, or at subnanomolar concentrations.
  • IC 50 values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro P2X 7 receptor-mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 4. Briefly, cells expressing P2X 7 receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration ⁇ e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3, Fluo-4 or Fura-2 (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to Cs ⁇ + ). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution.
  • an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3, Fluo-4 or Fura-2 (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA)
  • a P2X 7 receptor agonist ⁇ e.g., ATP or 2'(3')-O- (4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate at, for example, a concentration equal to the EC 50 concentration), and a fluorescence response is measured.
  • a P2X 7 receptor agonist e.g., ATP or 2'(3')-O- (4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate at, for example, a concentration equal to the EC 50 concentration
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists When agonist-contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a P2X 7 receptor antagonist, the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound, hi certain embodiments, P2X 7 receptor antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X 7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound equal to the IC 5O . Certain such antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X 7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound that is 100-fold higher than the IC 50 .
  • P2X 7 receptor modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 5.
  • Modulators provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on P2X 7 receptor activity within such a functional assay.
  • preferred modulators are non-sedating.
  • a dose of modulator that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than Vz the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al.
  • a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation.
  • a modulator provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
  • compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D.
  • differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for modulators used to treat pain or neurodegenerative disease by modulating CNS P2X 7 receptor activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent, while low brain levels of modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain or certain inflammatory diseases (e.g. rheumatoid arthritis) may be preferred (i.e., such doses do not provide brain (e.g., CSF) levels of the compound sufficient to significantly modulate P2X 7 receptor activity).
  • CNS P2X 7 receptor activity preferably T.I.D. dosing, more preferably B.I.D. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing.
  • modulators used to treat pain or neurodegenerative disease by modulating CNS P2X 7 receptor activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent
  • low brain levels of modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain or certain inflammatory diseases e.g. rheum
  • Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use.
  • assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers.
  • Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously).
  • Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays.
  • Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described, for example, within Example 7 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
  • nontoxic shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans).
  • FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
  • a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
  • cells treated as described therein with 100 ⁇ M of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • a compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 5O for the compound.
  • a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals.
  • a compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 5 0 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 at P2X 7 receptor for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory animals (e.g., rodents) by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC 5O or IC 50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP 1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 at P2X 7 receptor for the compound.
  • microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities such as CYP 1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 at P2X 7 receptor for the compound.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC 5 0 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
  • modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled.
  • compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 0, 31 P, 32 P, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl.
  • substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2 H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • PREPARATION OF 5-MEMBERED HETEROCYCLIC AMIDES AND RELATED COMPOUNDS 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, MO), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. In some cases, protecting groups may be required during preparation. Such protecting groups can be removed by methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as methods described in Greene and Wuts, "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis" (2 nd Edition, John
  • Scheme 6 illustrates the preparation of certain compounds provided herein that have a thiazole core.
  • Thiazole 5-carboxylic acid ester is made by condensing carbothioic acid amide 1 and 2-halogen-3-oxo-carboxylic acid ester. Hydrolysis of the ester followed by amination of the resulting acid generates the desired product.
  • Scheme 7 illustrates a general route for the preparation of certain compounds provided herein that have a thiazole core.
  • Condensation of thiourea and the 2-halogen-3-oxo- carboxylic acid ester generates the 2-aminothiazole, which is converted to the bromothiazole via Sandermyer reaction.
  • the bromothiazole can be either coupled to an organometallic compound under transition metal catalyzed reaction conditions, such as a boronic acid under Suzuki condition or an organostannane under Stille reaction condition, or condensed directly with a heterocycle to give the thiazole ester. Hydrolysis of the thiazole ester followed by amination of the resulting acid generates the desired product.
  • Scheme 8 illustrates a general route for the preparation of certain compounds provided herein that have a thiazole core.
  • Condensation of thiourea and the 2-halogen-3-oxo- carboxylic acid ester generates the 2-aminothiazole
  • Scheme 8 illustrates a general method for preparing certain compounds provided herein that have a thiazole core. Protection of the 2-aminothiazole 5-carboxylic acid ester by t-Boc, followed by hydrolysis, amination, deprotection, and Sandermyer reaction generates the bromothiazole.
  • the desired product is prepared by coupling the bromothiazole with an organometallic compound under transition metal catalyzed reaction conditions or by condensing the bromothiazole directly with a heterocycle.
  • Scheme 14 In Scheme 14, a thiophene carboxylic acid is reacted with an amine in the presence of a base such as TEA and a dehydrating agent such as 2-chloro-l,3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide.
  • a base such as TEA
  • a dehydrating agent such as 2-chloro-l,3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride
  • a solvent such as dimethylacetamide.
  • Scheme 15 illustrates a general method for preparing compounds of Formula X. Curtius rearrangement of the acid generates the amino intermediate, which provides the compound of Formula X upon amination.
  • Scheme 17 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH 2 -CH 2 -
  • Raney Nickel as a catalyst in a solvent such as 7N ammonia in methanol provides NH 2 -CH 2 - CHR 5 -Y or NH 2 -CH 2 -CR 5 R 5 -Y.
  • a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
  • Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms. As noted above, all stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms).
  • Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
  • Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope.
  • Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14 C), hydrogen (e.g., 3 H), sulfur (e.g., 35 S) or iodine (e.g., 125 I).
  • Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous- catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate.
  • certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate.
  • Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
  • compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., sodium bicarbonate, neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose, starch, mannitol or dextrans), proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives.
  • other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • compositions may be fo ⁇ nulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique, hi certain embodiments, compositions suitable for oral use are preferred.
  • Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs.
  • compositions may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
  • Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch).
  • Formulation for direct administration into the bladder may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations. Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
  • inert diluents e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate
  • granulating and disintegrating agents e.g., corn starch or alginic acid
  • binding agents e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia
  • lubricating agents e.g.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • an inert solid diluent e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate).
  • suspending agents e.g., sodium carb
  • Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and/or one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations.
  • Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate).
  • An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • sweetening agents such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components.
  • Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery.
  • Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols (e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols (e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices.
  • organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin
  • glycols e.g., butylene, isoprene or
  • a composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials.
  • stabilizing agents such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials.
  • stabilizing agents such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
  • a topical formulation may be prepared in any of a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions.
  • the physical appearance and viscosity of such pharmaceutically acceptable forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjusters) present in the formulation.
  • Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsif ⁇ ers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity.
  • These formulations may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers.
  • Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate.
  • Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate.
  • a gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants.
  • dimethicone copolyol polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG- dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations.
  • Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate.
  • Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol.
  • Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils.
  • Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5.
  • Suitable additional ingredients that may be included a topical formulation include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants.
  • a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%).
  • a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight.
  • Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectible aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • the compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
  • Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration).
  • Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non- irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
  • a conventional propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane.
  • compositions may be formulated for release at a pre-determined rate.
  • Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract).
  • Controlled release formulations i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration
  • a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period.
  • One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate.
  • the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours.
  • Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled-release coating.
  • the release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • the matrix material which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s).
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet).
  • active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying.
  • additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution).
  • the matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
  • a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium).
  • the controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free.
  • Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body).
  • pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
  • the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration.
  • Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing.
  • Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, hie, West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EIIDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin.
  • Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
  • Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion.
  • the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use.
  • pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses ⁇ e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers ⁇ e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water- soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts.
  • a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology ⁇ see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
  • controlled release formulations may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of controlled release dosage forms
  • a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water ⁇ e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock).
  • Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • Compounds are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day ⁇ e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses ⁇ e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated, the particular mode of administration and any other co-administered drugs. Dosage units generally contain between from about 10 ⁇ g to about 500 mg of active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art. Pharmaceutical compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to
  • Packaged pharmaceutical compositions generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein and (ii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation in the patient.
  • instructions e.g., labeling or a package insert
  • P2X 7 receptor modulators provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of P2X 7 receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of ligand agonist to P2X 7 receptor in vitro or in vivo.
  • such methods comprise the step of contacting a P2X 7 receptor with one or more P2X 7 receptor modulators provided herein, in the presence of ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to P2X 7 receptor.
  • the modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 4).
  • the P2X 7 receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell.
  • the P2X 7 receptor is expressed by a cell that is present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid.
  • one or more modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 20 micromolar or less, 10 micromolar or less, 5 micromolar or less, or 1 micromolar or less.
  • such compounds may be administered at a therapeutically effective dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
  • methods for modulating, preferably reducing, cellular P2X 7 receptor activation and/or activity such as signal-transducing activity (e.g., calcium conductance).
  • Such modulation may be achieved by contacting a P2X 7 receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with one or more modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor.
  • the modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction as described herein.
  • the receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient.
  • the cell may be contacted in vivo in an animal.
  • Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux).
  • Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain or inflammation) of a patient being treated with one or more modulators provided herein.
  • P2X 7 receptor modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating P2X 7 receptor signal-transducing activity.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to
  • treatment encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms).
  • a condition is "responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation” if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a P2X 7 receptor, regardless of the amount of P2X 7 agonist present locally, and/or if modulation of P2X 7 receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof.
  • Such conditions include, for example, pain, inflammation, cardiovascular disorders, neurodegenerative disorders and respiratory disorders (such as cough, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, cystic fibrosis and rhinitis, including allergic rhinitis, such as seasonal an perennial rhinitis, and non-allergic rhinitis), fibrosis as well as other conditions described in more detail below.
  • Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art.
  • Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated; however, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy, hi general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
  • Pain that may be treated using the modulators provided herein includes, for example, acute, chronic, inflammatory, and neuropathic pain.
  • Specific pain indications that may be treated as described herein include, but are not limited to, pain associated with osteoarthritis or rheumatoid arthritis; various neuropathic pain syndromes (such as post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, diabetic neuropathy, Guillian Barre syndrome, fibromyalgia, oral neuropathic pain, phantom limb pain, post-mastectomy pain, peripheral neuropathy, myofascial pain syndromes, MS-related neuropathy, HIV or AIDS- related neuropathy, and chemotherapy-induced and other iatrogenic neuropathies); visceral pain, (such as that associated with gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD), irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, pancreatitis, intestinal gas, gynecological disorders (e.g., menstrual pain
  • Further pain conditions that can be treated as described herein include Charcot's pains, ear pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain (e.g., odontalgia), carpel tunnel syndrome, acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, "non-painful” neuropathies, complex regional pain syndrome, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain - including pain associated with carcinoma, often referred to as cancer-associated pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma-associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, episiotomy pain, pain from cuts, musculoskeletal pain, bruises and broken bones, and burn pain, especially primary hyperalgesia associated therewith).
  • Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with autoimmune diseases
  • Conditions associated with inflammation and/or immune system disorders include, but are not limited to, arthritis (including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, Reiter's syndrome, gout, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, gouty arthritis and juvenile arthritis); cystic fibrosis; uveitis; systemic lupus erythematosus (and associated glomerulonephritis); spondyloarthropathies; psoriasis; scleritis; allergic conditions (including allergic reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic contact hypersensitivity, allergic dermatitis, eczema and contact dermatitis), reperfusion injury (e.g., cardiac and renal reperfusion injury), respiratory system disorders (including hyper-responsiveness of the airway, cough, asthma (e.g., to prevent or decrease the severity of both acute early phase asthma attack and the late phase
  • arthritis including osteoarthritis,
  • pathologic sequellae associated with insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus including diabetic retinopathy
  • lupus nephropathy including diabetic retinopathy
  • Heyman nephritis membranous nephritis and other forms of glomerulonephritis
  • macular degeneration e.g., contact sensitivity responses, and inflammation resulting from contact of blood with artificial surfaces as occurs, for example, during extracorporeal circulation of blood (e.g., during hemodialysis or via a heart-lung machine, for example, in association with vascular surgery such as coronary artery bypass grafting or heart valve replacement) such as extracorporeal post-dialysis syndrome, or in association with contact with other artificial vessel or container surfaces (e.g., ventricular assist devices, artificial heart machines, transfusion tubing, blood storage bags, plasmapheresis, plateletpheresis, and the like).
  • other artificial vessel or container surfaces e.g., ventricular assist devices, artificial heart machines, transfusion
  • Cardiovascular disorders such as cardiovascular disease, stroke, cerebral ischemia, myocardial infarction, atherosclerosis, ischemic heart disease, ischemia-reperfusion injury, aortic aneurysm, and congestive heart failure;
  • Neurological disorders e.g., neurodegeneration
  • neurodegenerative conditions associated with progressive CNS disorders including, but not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, Creutzfeldt- Jakob disease, dementia with Lewy bodies, traumatic brain injury, spinal cord injury, neurotrauma, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, and encephalitis; epilepsy and seizure disorders; multiple sclerosis and other demyelinating syndromes; cerebral atherosclerosis; vasculitis; temporal arteritis; myasthenia gravis; neurosarcoidosis; and central and peripheral nervous system complications of malignant, infectious or autoimmune processes; the modulators provided herein may also be used to promote neuroregeneration; Centrally-mediated neuropsychiatric disorders, such as depression, depression mania, bipolar disease, anxiety, schizophrenia, eating disorders, sleep disorders and cognition disorders; Obesity (e.g., the modulator may be used to promote weight loss in an
  • modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation (e.g., conditions involving pain and/or inflammatory components).
  • conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs.
  • Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebro- vascular disease and certain infectious diseases.
  • a modulator is administered to a patient along with a second therapeutic agent (e.g., an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent).
  • a second therapeutic agent e.g., an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the modulator and second therapeutic agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order.
  • Anti-inflammatory agents include, for example, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX- 2) specific cyclooxgenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, leflunomide, cyclosporine A, IM gold, minocycline, azathioprine, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, soluble TNF alpha receptor (etanercept), anti-TNF alpha antibodies (e.g., infliximab and adalimumab), anti-C5 antibodies, interleukin-1 (IL-I) receptor antagonists (e.g., anakinra or IL-I trap), IL- 18 binding protein, CTLA4-Ig (e.g., abatacept), anti-human DL-6 receptor monoclonal antibody (e.g., tocilizumab), LFA-3-Ig fusion proteins (e.g., ale
  • NSAIDs include, but are not limited to, ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, naproxen or naproxen sodium, diclofenac, combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol, sulindac, oxaprozin, diflunisal, piroxicam, indomethacin, etodolac, fenoprofen calcium, ketoprofen, sodium nabumetone, sulfasalazine, tolmetin sodium, and hydroxychloroquine.
  • COX cyclooxygenase
  • NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates, and salsalate, as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone.
  • salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin
  • sodium salicylate sodium salicylate
  • choline and magnesium salicylates sodium salicylate
  • salsalate sodium salicylate
  • corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone.
  • Suitable dosages for P2X 7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference.
  • the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount).
  • the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a modulator.
  • this dosage is less than 3 A, even more preferably less than 1 A, and highly preferably, less than 1 A of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the antiinflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a modulator.
  • the dosage amount of modulator component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be reduced by the co-administraction of the anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents.
  • the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more modulators and one or more antiinflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition.
  • modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications.
  • Certain such medications are also antiinflammatory agents, and are listed above.
  • Other such medications are analgesic agents, including narcotic agents which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., ⁇ , K and/or ⁇ ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists.
  • opioid receptor subtypes e.g., ⁇ , K and/or ⁇
  • Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
  • narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanil, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, nalbuphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan
  • narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonitazene, e
  • analgesic agents include, for example acetaminophen (paracetamol); aspirin and other NSAIDs described above; NR2B antagonists; bradykinin antagonists; anti-migraine agents; anticonvulsants such as oxcarbazepine and carbamazepine; antidepressants (such as TCAs, SSRIs, SNRIs, substance P antagonists, etc.); spinal blocks; pentazocine/naloxone; meperidine; levorphanol; buprenorphine; hydromorphone; fentanyl; sufentanyl; oxycodone; oxycodone/acetaminophen, nalbuphine and oxymorphone.
  • analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AM1241, capsaicin receptor antagonists and compounds that bind to the ⁇ 2 ⁇ subunit of voltage-gated calcium channels, such as gabapentin and pregabalin.
  • Representative anti-migraine agents for use in combination with a modulator provided herein include CGRP antagonists, capsaicin receptor antagonists, ergotamines and 5- HTi agonists, such as sumatripan, naratriptan, zolmatriptan and rizatriptan.
  • modulators provided herein may be used, for example, in the treatment of pulmonary disorders such as asthma, in combination with one or more beta(2)-adrenergic receptor agonists or leukotriene receptor antagonists (e.g., agents that inhibits the cysteinyl leukotriene CySLT 1 receptor).
  • CysLTi antagonists include montelukast, zafirlukast, and pranlukast. .
  • Suitable dosages for P2X 7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than 3 A, less than 1 A, less than % or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer). For use in combination therapy, pharmaceutical compositions as described above may further comprise one or more additional medications as described above. In certain such compositions, the additional medication is an analgesic.
  • packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprising one or more modulators and one or more additional medications (e.g., analgesics) in the same package.
  • Such packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein; (ii) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one additional medication (such as a pain relief and/or anti-inflammatory medication) as described above and (iii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the compositions are to be used simultaneously, separately or sequentially for treating or preventing a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation in the patient (such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates).
  • a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates.
  • the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the modulator compounds provided herein.
  • such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of P2X 7 receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof).
  • modulators provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group
  • modulators provided herein may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites.
  • modulators provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity or as radiotracers (e.g., in receptor mapping procedures).
  • a modulator compound may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and used as a probe for receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of P2X 7 receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples, which may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York, which sections are incorporated herein by reference.
  • receptor mapping procedures also include methods that can be used to characterize P2X 7 receptor in living subjects, such as positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computerized tomography
  • Mass spectroscopy data provided herein is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode. Unless otherwise specified, such data is obtained using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp.), Waters 996 photodiode array detector (Waters Corp.), and a Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, WI). MassLynxTM (Waters Corp.) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx Global ServerTM, OpenLynxTM and AutoLynxTM processing is used for data collection and analysis.
  • Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT Waters Corp.; Milford, MA
  • Waters 600 pump Waters Corp.
  • Waters 996 photodiode array detector Waters Corp.
  • Gilson 215 autosampler Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, WI.
  • Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50x4.6mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP- 18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 mL/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340 nm UV range.
  • the elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A - 95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B - 5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA.
  • the following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min 10-100%B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 min, return to 10%B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min. Where indicated, retention times (R ⁇ ) are provided in minutes.
  • Step 3 l-(4-Amino-5-fluoro-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethy l)-amide
  • Step 2 1 -(4-Amino-5 -fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-3 -(trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
  • Step 3 1 -(4-amino-5-fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-N-(( 1 -(pyridin-3 -yl)cyclohexyl)methyl)-3 - (trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-pyrazole-4-carboxamide
  • BOP (18 mg, 0.04 mmol) is added to a solution of l-(4-ammo-5-fluoro-pyrimidin-2- yl)-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (10 mg, 0.03 mmol), (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexyl)-methylamine (8 mg, 0.04 mmol), HOBt (2 mg, 0.01 mmol) and DIEA (1.7 ⁇ L, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (0.2 mL) at rt. The mixture is stirred for 4 h. H 2 O is added. The mixture is extracted with 5% MeOH in DCM and dried over Na 2 SO 4 .
  • Step 1 3 -Methyl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-amide
  • Step 2 l-(4-Amino-5-methyl-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-methyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -y lmethyl)-amide
  • Potassium tert-butoxide (2.4 g, 21.23 mmol) is added to a mixture of ethyl 3-amino- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (3.0 g, 19.3 mmol) and 2-chloropyrimidine (2.2 g, 19.3 mmol) in 50 mL of anhydrous dioxane.
  • the reaction mixture is heated to 100 °C and stirred for 2 h.
  • the solvent is removed in vacuo, and the residue is partitioned between EtOAc and water (50 mL each).
  • a l N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (3.0 mL) is added to a suspension of ethyl 3-amino-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (500 mg, 2.14 mmol) in 6.0 mL of EtOH.
  • the reaction mixture is heated to 50 °C for 16 h. After cooling to RT, water is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (3 x 20 mL).
  • the precipitated solid is collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as an off-white solid.
  • a solution of sodium nitrite (1.0 g, 15.1 mmol) in 5.0 rnL of water is added dropwise to a solution of ethyl 3-amino-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (2.7 g, 11.6 mmol) in 18 mL of cone. HCl at -5 °C with stirring. After 1 h at 0 °C, the reaction mixture is added dropwise to a suspension of copper (I) chloride (1.8 g, 18.6 mmol) in 18 mL of CHCI 3 at RT. After 1 h at RT, water (40 mL) and CHCl 3 (40 mL) are added, and the layers are separated.
  • a 1 N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (2.0 mL) is added to a suspension of ethyl S-chloro-l-pyrimidin ⁇ -yl-lH-pyrazole ⁇ -carboxylate (250 mg, 1.11 mmol) in 5.0 mL of EtOH.
  • the reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 1 h. Water is added, and the solution is washed with EtOAc.
  • the precipitated solid is collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid.
  • Step 2 1 -Methyl-3 -phenyl-N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 H-pyrazole-5 - carboxamide
  • Step 1 2-Pyrimidinecarbothioamide A mixture of 2-cyanopyrimidine (15 g) and thioacetamide (20 g) in 100 mL of 10% concentrated HCl in DMF is heated with stirring at 90 °C for three hours and cooled. The solid is collected by filtration, washed with water and dried to afford the title compound.
  • This compound is prepared essentially as described for 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4- trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid, with readily apparent starting material modification.
  • Step 1 4-(l-cyano-cycloheptyl)-piperazine-l-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester
  • the amine (0.2 M in toluene; 0.10 mL) and acid (0.2 M in DMA; 0.12 mL) are added to a vial along with DMC 3 (0.2 M in ACN, freshly prepared; 0.2 mL) and TEA (0.3 M in toluene; 0.10 mL) are added to a vial and incubated at RT for 16 h.
  • the reaction mixture is then extracted with 1 N NaOH (0.5 mL) and EtOAc (0.5 mL).
  • the upper organic layer is removed and concentrated to dryness.
  • the residue is purified via solid phase extraction chromatography eluting with 25%MeOH/EtOAc (4.0 mL) to afford the title compound.
  • IC 50 determined as described in Example 4A is 2 micromolar or less (i e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to 80 ⁇ M of (2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate is 2 micromolar or less).
  • Mass spectroscopy data is provided as (M+ 1) in the column headed "MS.”
  • the retention time, in minutes, is provided in the column headed R 1 . It will be apparent that, within Table I and elsewhere herein, an amine designated is the same as
  • SH-SY5Y cells ATCC Number CRL-2266, (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, VA) are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO 2 and at 37 °C.
  • DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO 2 and at 37 °C.
  • cells are plated at a density of 100,000 cells/well in a 96 well black/clear TC plate (Corning® Costar®, Sigma-Aldrich Co., St. Louis, MO).
  • the culture medium is removed and cells are incubated with 50 ⁇ L of 2.3 ⁇ M Fluo-4 AM dye (Invitrogen Corp.) in the assay solution (5 mM KCl, 9.6 mM NaH 2 PO 4 H 2 O, 25 mM HEPES, 280 mM sucrose, 5 mM glucose, and 0.5 mM CaCl 2 ; pH is adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH) for an hour at 37 °C.
  • wells are rinsed once with 50 ⁇ L assay solution, and are then incubated for an hour at room temperature with 100 ⁇ L assay solution containing the test compound.
  • test compound generally ranges from 1 to 2500 nM; for positive control cells, no test compound is added. After the one hour incubation, plates are transferred to a FLIPR TETRA instrument (Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA) for calcium mobilization analysis.
  • P2X 7 agonist (2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl- benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate (BzATP; Sigma-Aldrich) in the assay solution is transferred using the FLIPR into the plate, such that the final agonist concentration is 80 ⁇ M (about EC 50 ).
  • BzATP Sigma-Aldrich
  • 50 ⁇ L of assay solution without agonist is added at this stage. The peak fluorescence signal over a 2 minute period is then measured.
  • the data is analyzed as follows. First, the average maximum relative fluorescent unit (RFU) response from the negative control wells (no agonist) is subtracted from the maximum response detected for each of the other experimental wells. Second, average maximum RFU response is calculated for the positive control wells (agonist wells). Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation:
  • the % inhibition data is plotted as a function of test compound concentration and test compound IC 50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition ⁇ 100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression.
  • the IC 50 is e ( - mtercept/slope)
  • the calculated IC 50 is preferably below 20 micromolar, more preferably below 10 micromolar, even more preferably below 5 micromolar and most preferably below 1 micromolar.
  • test compounds Similar assays are performed in the absence of added agonist for the determination of agonist activity of the test compounds.
  • the ability of a test compound to act as an agonist of P2X 7 receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response elicited by the test compound as a function of compound concentration.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists that exhibit no detectable agonist activity elicit no detectable fluorescence response at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
  • SH-SY5Y cells are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10%
  • This Example illustrates a representative method for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a test compound.
  • Animals are then subjected to the first baseline, second baseline and testing on consecutive days. For each baseline, the animal is restrained as in the habituation session and the paw tested using the paw pressure testing apparatus (Digital Randall Selitto, IITC Inc., Woodland Hills, CA). Animals are baselined and tested in groups of ten, each animal being tested once on the left and right hindpaws, followed by the next consecutive animal. This procedure is repeated three times for a total of three measurements on each hindpaw. If any individual read is drastically different (varies by more than about 100 g) from the other two on a given hindpaw, the hindpaw is retested a 4 th time, and the average of the three most consistent scores is used.
  • the paw pressure testing apparatus Digital Randall Selitto, IITC Inc., Woodland Hills, CA.
  • Test compounds or vehicle may be administered by various routes at various timepoints prior to testing, but for any particular assay, the routes and timepoints are the same for animals in each treatment group administered test compound (a different dosage of test compound may be administered to each such group) and those in the treatment group administered vehicle control. If a compound is orally administered, the animals are food-deprived the evening before testing. As with the baseline, each hindpaw is tested three times and the results recorded for analysis.
  • Hypersensitivity of nociception values are calculated for each treatment group as the mean of the left foot gram force scores on test day (left foot only or LFO score). Statistical significance between treatment groups is determined by running an ANOVA on LFO scores followed with a least significant difference (LSD) post hoc test. A p ⁇ 0.05 is considered to be a statistically significant difference.
  • Compounds are said to relieve pain in this model if they result in a statistically significant reduction in hypersensitivity of nociception values compared to vehicle controls, determined as described above, when administered (0.01-50 mg/kg, orally, parenterally or topically) immediately prior to testing as a single bolus, or for several days: once or twice or three times daily prior to testing.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Heterocyclic Compounds Containing Sulfur Atoms (AREA)
  • Thiazole And Isothizaole Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Hydrogenated Pyridines (AREA)

Abstract

5-Membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds are provided, of the Formula: wherein variables are as described herein. Such compounds are ligands that may be used to modulate specific receptor activity in vivo or in vitro, and are particularly useful in the treatment of conditions associated with pathological receptor activation in humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock animals. Pharmaceutical compositions and methods for using such compounds to treat such disorders are provided, as are methods for using such ligands for receptor localization studies.

Description

5-MEMBERED HETEROCYCLIC AMIDES AND RELATED COMPOUNDS
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates generally to 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds that have useful pharmacological properties. The invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treating conditions related to P2X7 receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to P2X7 receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of P2X7 receptors.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Pain perception, or nociception, is mediated by the peripheral terminals of a group of specialized sensory neurons, termed "nociceptors." A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
Neuropathic pain, which typically results from damage to the nervous system, involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, pain from a normally innocuous stimulus (allodynia) and increased pain from a normally painful stimulus (hyperalgesia). In most instances, neuropathic pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating than the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
Existing treatments for neuropathic pain are generally suboptimal. Opiates, such as morphine, are potent analgesics, but their usefulness is limited because of adverse side effects, such as physical addictiveness and withdrawal properties, as well as respiratory depression, mood changes, and decreased intestinal motility with concomitant constipation, nausea, vomiting, and alterations in the endocrine and autonomic nervous systems. In addition, neuropathic pain is frequently non-responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens, or to treatment with other drugs, such as gabapentin. Treatments employing the N-methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)- adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects.
Another common condition for which existing therapies are insufficient or problematic is inflammation. Transient inflammation is a beneficial mechanism that protects mammals from invading pathogens. Uncontrolled inflammation, however, causes tissue damage and pain and is the underlying cause of many illnesses, including asthma, as well as other allergic, infectious, autoimmune, degenerative, and idiopathic diseases. Existing treatments often exhibit low, delayed or only temporary efficacy, undesirable side-effects and/or a lack of selectivity. There is a continuing need for new drugs that overcome one or more of the shortcomings of drugs currently used for immunosuppression or in the treatment or prevention of inflammatory disorders, including allergic disorders, autoimmune disorders, fibrogenic disorders, and neurodegenerative diseases, such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease, and Huntington's disease.
The P2X7 receptor is a ligand-gated ion channel that is activated by ATP and is present on a variety of cell types, including microglia in the central nervous system and cells involved in inflammation and immune system function, such as immune cells. In particular, P2X7 is involved in activation of lymphocytes and monocyte/macrophages leading to the increased release of pro-inflammatory cytokines (e.g., TNFalpha and IL-lbeta) from these cells. Recent studies indicate that inhibiting P2X7 receptor activation in situations of inflammation (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis and other autoimmune diseases, osteoarthritis, uveitis, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and inflammatory bowel disease) or interstitial fibrosis results in a therapeutic effect. These and other studies indicate that P2X7 receptor antagonists may find use in the treatment and prophylaxis of pain, including acute, chronic and neuropathic pain, as well as a variety of other conditions including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis).
Small molecule P2X7 receptor antagonists are desirable for such therapies. The present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A:
Formula A
Figure imgf000003_0001
as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates), amides and esters of such compounds. Within Formula A:
Figure imgf000004_0001
represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring; W is -C(=O)NR4-, -NR4C(=O) - or -NR4-NR4-C(=O) -;
X is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) hydroxy and -COOH; (ii) C1- C8alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-
(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (iii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and (iv) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii), (iii) and (iv) is optionally substituted, and each of which (ii), (iii) and (iv) is preferably substituted with from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-
C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is C1-C8alkyl, C3-C16cycloalkyl, 4- to 16-membered heterocycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or (5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-
C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-
C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; each R4 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L is absent or C1- C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon- carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, which alkylene is optionally substituted with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone; A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl; and M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocyc Ie)C0-
C4alkyl, (4- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1-
C6alkanoylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1-
C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-
C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
Within certain aspects, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula I:
Figure imgf000005_0001
in which: Y is C4-C12cycloalkyl that is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl; R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or (Ii-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-( C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; such that R2 is not an alkoxy or haloalkoxy group if
Figure imgf000006_0001
represents pyrazole or imidazole; RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein L and A are as described above and M is: (i) hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C3-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1-C6alkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di- C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; such that:
RA is not unsubstituted benzyl; and
if
Figure imgf000006_0002
represents pyrazole or imidazole and L is absent, then:
(a) A is not O; and
(b) if A is absent, then M is not unsubstituted or substituted C1-C6alkoxy; and the remaining variables are as described for Formula A.
Within certain aspects, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula EH:
Formula III
Figure imgf000006_0003
as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates), amides and esters of such compounds. Within Formula III:
Z1, Z2 and Z3 are independently N, NH, CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z1, Z2 and Z3 is chosen from O and S; W, R2 and R4 are as described for Formula A;
V is C1-C6alkylene that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) C1-C4alkyl, (C3-Cscycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (ii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring; and (iii) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is C3-C16cycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
Either:
(i) each R5 is independently hydrogen, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl or (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-
C4alkyl, such that at least one R5 is not hydrogen; or
(ii) both R5 moieties are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3-C7cycloalkyl; and
RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L is as described for Formula A; A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, (C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl; and M is a (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or (Ii-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or (Ii-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7- membered heterocycle; such that RA is not pyrrole.
Within further aspects, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula IV or Formula V:
Figure imgf000008_0001
Formula IV Formula V as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates), amides and esters of such compounds. Within Formulas IV and V: W is -C(=O)NR4- or -NR4C(=O) -; X is C2-C6alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy and -COOH;
(ii) C1-C3alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl;
(iii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and (iv) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to
7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii), (iii) and (iv) is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; R2 and R4 are as described for Formula A;
Y is C3-C16cycloalkyl, phenyl or 6- to 10-membered heterocycle, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-
C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkanoylammo, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; RA comprises a ring and has the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L and A are as described for Formula A; and
M is:
(i) hydroxy, cyano, amino, halogen, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0- C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1- C6alkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(a) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and - COOH; and
(b) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkenyl and C1- C4haloalkyl; such that RA is not: (i) pyridazine that is substituted with C1-C6alkoxy, (ii) substituted or unsubstituted benzyl, (iii) unsubstituted phenyl or (iv) an O-linked moiety. Within certain aspects, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula VI:
Formula VI
Figure imgf000009_0001
as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates), amides and esters of such compounds. Within Foπnula VI: W and X and each R4 are as described for Formula A;
Y is Q-C1gcycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-
C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; R3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether or (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; and RA is phenylC0-C4alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-
(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C1-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
Within certain aspects, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula VII:
Formula VII
Figure imgf000010_0001
or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
Figure imgf000010_0002
represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ri .ng; such that is not furan, lH-pyrrole or isoxazole;
W, R2 and each R4 are as described for Formula A;
V is absent or C1-C5alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl,
C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (ii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a
4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and (iii) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each R5 is independently (i) -COOH; (ii) (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2- C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; or (iii) taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C1-C6cycloalkyl or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii) or (iii) is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chose from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, C1- C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one R5 is not methyl; and Ri i and R12 are
(i) independently chosen from C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, Q-C6alkynyl and (Q- C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl; or
(ii) taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound to form a 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (i) and (ii) is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamrriθ)carbonyl, and 4- to 7- membered heterocycle; and RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L and A are as described for Formula A; and
M is:
(i) hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or — COOH; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0-
C4alkyl, (4- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1- Qalkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1-
C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-
Cόalkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-
C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7- membered heterocycle; such that (i) RA is not methyl, acetyl or trifluoroethanone; (ii) is thiophene,
then Rn and Rn not taken together to form morpholinyl; (iii) if
Figure imgf000012_0001
is pyrazole, then
RA is not benzyl or 4-methylbenzyl; and (iv) if
Figure imgf000012_0002
is thiazole, then RA is not unsubstituted phenyl, unsubstituted pyridin-2-yl, unsubstituted thiophen-2-yl, unsubstituted thiophen-3-yl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 3,4- dimethoxyphenyl or 4-(p-tolyloxymethyl).
Within certain aspects, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula VIII:
Formula Vm
Figure imgf000012_0003
or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein: W and each R4 are as described for Formula A;
Figure imgf000012_0004
is a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; Y is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-
C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-( C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-CC1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-C6alky^sulfonylamino;
R3 is halogen, cyano, C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; and
RA is phenylC0-C4alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C,-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
Within still further aspects, the present invention provides 5 -membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A that further satisfy Formula IX:
Formula IX
Figure imgf000013_0001
or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
Figure imgf000013_0002
represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring; such that is not furan or isoxazole; Y is 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C8alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; R2 is as described for Formula A;
RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein L, A and M are as described for Formula A;
such that (i) RA is not methyl; and (ii) if
Figure imgf000013_0003
— is thiazole, then RA is not unsubstituted phenyl or unsubstituted thiophen-3-yl.
Within certain aspects, 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A or I-IX, as well as other Formula(s) provided herein, are P2X7 receptor antagonists and exhibit an IC50 value of no greater than 20 micromolar, 10 micromolar, 5 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, or 100 nanomolar in an in vitro assay for determination of P2X7 receptor antagonist activity, hi certain embodiments, such P2X7 receptor antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor activity (i.e., within an assay provided in Example 4, herein) at a concentration equal to the IC50, 10 times the IC50 or 100 times the IC5O and/or at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
Within certain aspects, 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
The present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one 5-membered heterocyclic amides or related compound provided herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
Within further aspects, methods are provided for modulating (e.g., reducing) cellular P2X7 receptor activation or activity, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., microglia, astrocyte or peripheral macrophage or monocyte) that expresses a P2X7 receptor with at least one P2X7 receptor modulator as described herein. Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of P2X7 receptor modulator that is sufficient to detectably alter P2X7 receptor activity in vitro (as determined using an assay provided in Example 4).
The present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
Within other aspects, methods are provided for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) pain a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
Within other aspects, methods are provided for treating inflammation in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) inflammation a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein. Methods are further provided for treating neurological and/or neurodegenerative disorders, cardiovascular disorders, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, ocular conditions (e.g., glaucoma), cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, or fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis) in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) one or more of the foregoing conditions a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
Within still further aspects, the present invention provides methods for inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein. Also provided herein are methods for promoting weight loss in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist such as, but not limited to, a P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to P2X7 receptor, comprising: (a) contacting P2X7 receptor with a labeled compound that is a 5-membered heterocyclic amides or related compound as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to P2X7 receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled compound; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled compound with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of P2X7 receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a compound as described herein under conditions that permit modulation by the compound of
P2X7 receptor activity; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound modulating P2X7 receptor activity.
The present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation, such as pain, inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder, osteoarthritis rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and/or fibrosis of internal organs such as interstitial fibrosis.
In yet another aspect, the present invention provides methods for preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
These and other aspects of the invention will become apparent upon reference to the following detailed description.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
As noted above, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds. Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate P2X7 receptor activity in a variety of contexts. TERMINOLOGY
Compounds are generally described herein using standard nomenclature. For compounds having asymmetric centers, it should be understood that (unless otherwise specified) all of the optical isomers and mixtures thereof are encompassed, hi addition, compounds with carbon-carbon double bonds may occur in Z- and E- forms, with all isomeric forms of the compounds being included in the present invention unless otherwise specified. Where a compound exists in various tautomeric forms, a recited compound is not limited to any one specific tautomer, but rather is intended to encompass all tautomeric forms. Certain compounds are described herein using a general formula that includes variables (e.g., Ri, A, X). Unless otherwise specified, each variable within such a formula is defined independently of any other variable, and any variable that occurs more than one time in a formula is defined independently at each occurrence.
The phrase "5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds," as used herein, encompasses all compounds of Formula A, I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII and/or DC, as well as compounds of other Formulas provided herein (including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, amides and esters of such compounds.
A "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication. Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids. Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2-acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbromide, methylnitrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate, pantothenate, phenylacetate, phosphate, polygalacturonate, propionate, salicylate, stearate, subacetate, succinate, sulfamate, sulfanilate, sulfate, sulfonates including besylate (benzenesulfonate), camsylate (camphorsulfonate), edisylate (ethane- 1,2- disulfonate), esylate (ethanesulfonate) 2-hydroxyethylsulfonate, mesylate (methanesulfonate), triflate (trifluoromethanesulfonate) and tosylate (p-toluenesulfonate), tannate, tartrate, teoclate and triethiodide. Similarly, pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc. Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize further pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein, hi general, a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method. Briefly, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
It will be apparent that each compound provided herein may, but need not, be formulated as a solvate (e.g, hydrate) or non-covalent complex, hi addition, the various crystal forms and polymorphs are within the scope of the present invention. Also provided herein are prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas. A "prodrug" is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound a formula provided herein. For example, a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein. Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate, benzoate and peptide derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein. Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (C1- C8alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (C1-C6alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (C1-C4alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl. "C0-Cnalkyl" refers to a single covalent bond (C0) or an alkyl group having from 1 to n carbon atoms; for example "C0-C4alkyl" refers to a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkyl group. In some instances, a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated. For example, "hydroxyalkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one -OH; "aminoalkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one -NH2.
"Alkenyl" refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C2-C8alkenyl, C2- C6alkenyl and C2-C4alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. "Alkynyl" refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond. Alkynyl groups include C2-C8alkynyl, C2-C6alkynyl and C2- C4alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
"Alkylene" refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above. C1-C2alkylene is methylene or ethylene; C0-C4alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or carbon atoms; C0-C2alkylene is a single covalent bond, methylene or ethylene.
A "C1-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond" is a C1-C6alkylene group as described above, or a divalent C2-C6alkene or C2-C6alkyne.
A "cycloalkyl" is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, mertanyl, and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C3-C7cycloalkyl, in which the cycloalkyl group contains a single ring having from 3 to 7 ring members, all of which are carbon. A "(C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyr' is a C3-C7cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkylene group.
Certain cycloalkyl groups are described herein as resulting from two substituents (e.g., R5 moieties) being taken together, along with any intervening atoms. "Intervening atoms" in this context are any atoms that appear in the chain of covalently bonded atoms linking the two substituents. If the two substituents are attached to the same carbon atom, then the carbon atom to which they are attached is the only intervening atom. If the two substituents are attached to different atoms (typically carbon or nitrogen), then the atoms to which they are attached are intervening atoms, as are additional atoms (if any) that are needed to complete the chain of covalent linkages between the two substituents. A "(C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkylene" is a divalent (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties, hi general, one such single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both such single covalent bonds are located on different ring members. For example, one a (C6cycloalkyl)C2alkylene moiety is:
Figure imgf000018_0001
By "alkoxy," as used herein, is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge. Alkoxy groups include C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C4alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
Similarly, "alkylthio" refers to an alkyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge, and "alkenylthio" refers to an alkenyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge.
The term "oxo" is used herein to refer to an oxygen substituent of a carbon atom that results in the formation of a carbonyl group (C=O). An oxo group that is a substituent of a nonaromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of -CH2- to -C(=O)-. An oxo group that is a substituent of an aromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of -CH- to -C(=O)- and may result in a loss of aromaticity.
The term "alkanoyl" refers to an acyl group (e.g., -(C=O)-alkyl), in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement and where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group. Alkanoyl groups have the indicated number of carbon atoms, with the carbon of the keto group being included in the numbered carbon atoms. For example a C2alkanoyl group is an acetyl group having the formula -(C=O)CH3. Alkanoyl groups include, for example, C1-Cgalkanoyl, C1-C6alkanoyl and C1-C4alkanoyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. "C1alkanoyl" refers to - (C=O)H.
"Alkyl ether" refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group). Alkyl ether groups include C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C6alkyl ether and C2-C4alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. A C2 alkyl ether has the structure -CH2-O-CH3.
The term "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to an alkoxy group attached through a keto (- (C=O)-) bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure -C(=O)-O-alkyl). Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C1-C8, C1-C6 and C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group (i.e., the carbon of the keto bridge is not included in the indicated number of carbon atoms). "C1alkoxycarbonyl" refers to -C(=O)-O-CH3; C3alkoxycarbonyl indicates -C(=O)-O-(CH2)2CH3 or -C(=O)-O- (CH)(CH3)2. "Alkanoyloxy," as used herein, refers to an alkanoyl group linked via an oxygen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure -O-C(=O)-alkyl). Alkanoyloxy groups include C1-C8, C1-C6 and C1-C4alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group. For example, "C1alkanoyloxy" refers to -0-C(O)-CH3. Similarly, "alkanoylamino," as used herein, refers to an alkanoyl group linked via a nitrogen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure -N(R)-C(=O)-alkyl), in which R is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl. Alkanoylamino groups include C1-C8, C1-C6 and C1- C4alkanoylamino groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms within the alkanoyl group, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group.
"Alkylsulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(SO2)-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C1-Q,alkylsulfonyl and C1- C4alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonyl is one representative alkylsulfonyl group. "C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl" is a C1-C6alkylsulfonyl moiety that is linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkylne group. "C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl" is an alkylsulfonyl group that has from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl). "C1-C6alkylsulfonyloxy" refers to a C1-C6alkylsulfonyl moiety that is linked via an oxygen bridge.
"Alkylsulfonylamino" refers to groups of the formula -N(R)-(SO2)-alkyl, in which R is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl and the nitrogen atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonylamino groups include C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino and C1-C4alkylsulfonylamino groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonylamino is a representative alkylsulfonylamino group. "C1-C6alkylsulfonylaminoC0-C4alkyl" is a C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino moiety linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkylene group. "C1-C6haloalkylsulfonylamino" is an alkylsulfonylamino group that has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonylamino).
"Aminosulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(SO2)-NH2, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. The term "mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl" refers to groups that satisfy the formula -(SO2)-NR2, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, and in which one R is C1-C6alkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen C1-C6alkyl.
"Alkylaminoalkyl" refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene-N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups. Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminoC1- C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C6alkyl and mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1- C6alkyl. "Mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminoC0-C6alkyl" refers to a mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C6alkylene group. The following are representative alkylaminoalkyl groups:
Figure imgf000021_0001
It will be apparent that the definition of "alkyl" as used in the terms "alkylamino" and "alkylaminoalkyl" differs from the definition of "alkyl" used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C6alkyl).
The term "aminocarbonyl" refers to an amide group (i.e., -(C=O)NH2). "Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(C=O)-N(R)2, in which the carbonyl is the point of attachment, one R is C1-C6alkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen C1-C6alkyl.
"Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl" is an aminocarbonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with C1-C6alkyl, and which is linked via a single covalent bond (i.e., mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl) or a C1-C4alkylene group (i.e., -(C0-C4alkyl)-(C=0)N(C1-C6alkyl)2). If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the C1-C6alkyl groups may be the same or different.
The term "aminosulfonyl" refers to a sulfonamide group (i.e., -(SO2)NH2). "Mono- or di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminosulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(SO2)-N(R)2, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, one R is C1-C8alkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen C1-C8alkyl. "Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl" is an aminosulfonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with C1-C6alkyl, and which is linked via a single covalent bond (i.e., mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl) or a C1-C4alkylene group (i.e., -(C1-C4alkyl)-(SO2)N(C1-C6alkyl)2). If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the C,- C6alkyl groups may be the same or different. The term "halogen" refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
A "haloalkyl" is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., "C1-Cehaloalkyl" groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples of haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta- chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l-trifluoromethyl-ethyl. Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl. The term "haloalkoxy" refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via an oxygen bridge. A dash ("-") that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, -CONH2 is attached through the carbon atom.
A "carbocycle" or "carbocyclic group" comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocycle), and does not contain a heterocycle. Unless otherwise specified, each ring within a carbocycle may be independently saturated, partially saturated or aromatic, and is optionally substituted as indicated. A carbocycle generally has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings and optionally further contains one or more alkylene bridges; carbocycles within certain embodiments have one ring or two fused rings. Typically, each ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C3-C8); C5-C7 rings are recited in certain embodiments. Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 16 ring members. Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl as described above (e.g., cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or adamantly). Other carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring, with or without one or more additional aromatic and/or cycloalkyl rings). Such aryl carbocycles include, for example, phenyl, naphthyl (e.g., 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl), fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphthyl.
Certain carbocycles recited herein are phenyl groups linked via a single covalent bond or C1-C2alkylene group (e.g., benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl), and are designated phenylC0-C2alkyl. A "heterocycle" or "heterocyclic group" has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic. Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocycle has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring. Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members. Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO2. Unless otherwise specified, a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated), such as a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, which generally comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 ring atoms that are independently chosen from C, O, N and S; or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic), such as a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl (which may be monocyclic or bicyclic) or a 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., pyridyl or pyrimidyl). N- linked heterocyclic groups are linked via a component nitrogen atom. A "heterocycleC0-C4alkyl" is a heterocyclic group linked via a single covalent bond or C1-C4alkylene group. A "(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C1-C4alkyl" is a heterocycloalkyl ring with from 4 to 7 ring members that is linked via a C1-C4alkylene group.
A "(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkylene" is a divalent (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties. In general, one such single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both such single covalent bonds are located on different ring members. For example, with respect to the group RA, if L is a (piperidinyl)C2alkylene, A is absent and M is -COOH, one RA moiety so formed is:
Figure imgf000023_0001
A "substituent," as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest. For example, a ring substituent may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member. Substituents of aromatic groups are generally covalently bonded to a ring carbon atom. The term "substitution" refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
Groups that are "optionally substituted" are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different). Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of possible substituents. Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents). Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent (e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents). The term "P2X7 receptor" refers to any P2X7 receptor, preferably a mammalian receptor such as the human or rat P2X7 receptor disclosed in US Patent No. 6,133,434, as well as homologues thereof found in other species.
A "P2X7 receptor modulator," also referred to herein as a "modulator," is a compound that modulates P2X7 receptor activation and/or P2X7 receptor-mediated activity (e.g., signal transduction). P2X7 receptor modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula A and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and esters thereof. A modulator may be a P2X7 receptor agonist or antagonist.
A modulator is considered an "antagonist" if it detectably inhibits P2X7 receptor- mediated signal transduction (using, for example, a representative assay provided in Example 4); in general, such an antagonist inhibits P2X7 receptor activation with a IC50 value of less than 20 micromolar, preferably less than 10 micromolar, more preferably less than 5 micromolar, more preferably less than 1 micromolar, still more preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and most preferably less than 100 nanomolar within an assay provided in Example 4. P2X7 receptor antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists. An "inverse agonist" of P2X7 receptor is a compound that reduces the activity of
P2X7 receptor below its basal activity level in the absence of added ligand. Inverse agonists of P2X7 receptor may also inhibit the activity of ligand at P2X7 receptor and/or binding of ligand to P2X7 receptor. The basal activity of P2X7 receptor, as well as a reduction in P2X7 receptor activity due to the presence of P2X7 receptor antagonist, may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay (e.g., the assay of Example 4).
A "neutral antagonist" of P2X7 receptor is a compound that inhibits the activity of ligand at P2X7 receptor, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 4 performed in the absence of ligand, P2X7 receptor activity is reduced by no more than 10%, preferably by no more than 5%, and more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity). Neutral antagonists of P2X7 receptor may inhibit the binding of ligand to P2X7 receptor.
As used herein a "P2X7 receptor agonist" is a compound that elevates the activity of the P2X7 receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances P2X7 receptor activation and/or P2X7 receptor-mediated activity, such as signal transduction). P2X7 receptor agonist activity may be detected using the representative assay provided in Example 4. P2X7 receptor agonists include ATP and 2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'- triphosephate (BzATP).
A "therapeutically effective amount" (or dose) is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from at least one condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain. A therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 4). It will be apparent that the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
By "statistically significant," as used herein, is meant results varying from control at the p<0.1 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
A "patient" is any individual treated with a compound provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to
P2X7 receptor modulation or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered at risk for the development of such symptoms).
5-MEMBERED HETEROCYCLIC AMIDES AND RELATED COMPOUNDS
As noted above, the present invention provides 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula A and other formulas recited herein. Within certain aspects, such compounds are modulators that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation, such as pain. Such modulators are also useful as probes for detection and localization of P2X7 receptor and as standards in P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction assays.
Within certain compounds of any of Formulas A, I, EI, IV, V or VI:
Figure imgf000025_0001
and
Ri represents from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-
Cόalkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-
C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl.
Certain such compounds of Formulas A or Formula I further satisfy Formula Ila, lib or lie:
Figure imgf000025_0002
Formula Ha Formula lib Formula lie wherein variables are as described above. Within certain embodiments of Formulas A, I and Ila-c, X is not absent (e.g., C1-Csalkylene, optionally substituted as described above). Within Formulas A, I, Ila-c or VII, as noted above, the heteroaryl core:
Figure imgf000026_0001
represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring that is substituted with exactly one substituent RA and is optionally substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents represented by R2. The 5-
membered heteroaryl ring represented by
Figure imgf000026_0002
is, in certain embodiments, pyrazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole or thiophene. R2, in certain embodiments, represents zero substituents or 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C1-C6alkyl and C1- Cfjhaloalkyl.
Representative subformulas of Formulas A, I and Ila-c include, for example:
Figure imgf000026_0003
Figure imgf000027_0001
in which each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-Cgalkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-
C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; Z], Z2 and Z3 are independently N, NH,
CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z1, Z2 and Z3 is chosen from O and S; Z4 and Z5 are independently CH, N, NH, O or S; and Ze is CH, S or O, such that no more than one of Z4, Z5 and Z6 is chosen from O and S. It will be apparent that, within these formulas and any others provided herein with such variables, any CH or NH moiety at Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5 and/or
Z6 may be substituted with a substituent represented by RA or R2, and that such substitution will result in the replacement of the hydrogen atom with a substituent represented by RA or
R2. In certain compounds in which the variable R3 is present, each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl.
Within certain 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formula
A, I, Ila-c, VII and other Formulas provided herein, RA is phenylC0-C2alkyl, (5- or 6- membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-
C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-
C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, (mono- or di-C1-
C6alkylamino)C0-C4alkyl, C1-Cealkylsulfonyl, C1-Cealkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
Within certain such compounds (e.g., compounds of Formula I or IH -c in which
Figure imgf000027_0002
represents pyrazole or imidazole), T is not O and RA is not unsubstituted benzyl.
Within further compounds, RA is phenylC0-C2alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0- C4alkyl, optionally substituted as described above, such that RA is not unsubstituted benzyl. Such RA moieties include, for example, (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle, wherein the 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl or chosen from
Figure imgf000028_0001
Within certain 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formulas A, I, Ila-TIc and other Formulas provided herein, RA is C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6arkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl-T- wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-Qhydroxyalkyl, C1-Cehaloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-Cgalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-Cealkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminocarbonyl, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1- Gjhaloalkyl.
Within certain such compounds (e.g., those in which
Figure imgf000028_0002
represents pyrazole or imidazole), RA is not optionally substituted alkoxy. Within further such compounds, RA is C3- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl, and 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl. Representative such RA moieties include, for example, C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, and mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C1-C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-Coalkylsulfonyloxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle. Within certain such compounds, RA is: (i) C3-C6alkyl that is substituted with amino, hydroxy or -COOH; or (ii) mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)ammoC0-C2alkyl that is substituted with from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, amino, - COOH and C1-C4alkylsulfonylamino.
Within further compounds of Formulas A, 1, Ila-c, VII and other Formulas provided herein, RA is a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000029_0001
wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is optionally substituted with oxo;
Figure imgf000029_0002
represents a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally fused to phenyl or to a 6-membered heteroaryl; and
R7 represents from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; (ii) C1-Q,alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-CθalkylsulfonylC0-Qalkyi, C1-CfialkylsulfonylaminoC0-C6alkyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and C1-Cealkylsulfonylamino; and (iii) substituents that are taken together to form a bridge of the Formula -(CH2)q-P-(CH2)r-
, wherein q and r are independently O or 1 and P is CH2, O, NH or S. Certain such RA moieties satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000029_0003
wherein: G is CH or N; s and t are independently O, 1, 2, 3 or 4, such that the sum of s and t ranges from 2 to 5; and Rg is: (i) hydrogen, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylaminoC0-C4alkyl, or 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, — COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, mono- or (Ii-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, and C1-Cealkylsulfonylamino. Other such RA moieties include:
Figure imgf000030_0002
wherein: R9 is: (i) C1-C6alkyl that is substituted with -COOH; or (ii) a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl that is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 oxo; and Ri0 represents one substituent chosen from: (i) -COOH; (ii) C1-C6alkyl that is substituted with -COOH; (iii) mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C2alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl and C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino; each of which is substituted with from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo and -COOH; and (iv) C1-Cehaloalkylsulfonylamino.
Within certain 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds of Formulas A, I, Ua-IIc and other Formulas provided herein, one or more of the following conditions applies:
(a) R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C1-C6alkyl and
C,-C6haloalkyl;
(b) X is methylene or ethylene, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and substituents that are taken together, with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
(c) Y is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C1hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and/or
(d) -W-X-Y is:
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure imgf000031_0001
wherein: Ri represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-Qhaloalkoxy, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or two R5 are taken together with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound to form a C3- Cgcycloalkyl.
Certain representative such compounds satisfy one of the following subformulas:
Figure imgf000031_0002
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein m is 0 or 1, and each R3 is as described above.
Representative subformulas of Formula III include, for example:
Figure imgf000032_0002
Figure imgf000033_0001
in which each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-Qalkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-Cealky^sulfonylamino; Z1, Z2 and Z3 are as described for Formula EH; Z4 and Z5 are independently CH, N, NH, O or S; and Z6 is CH, S or O, such that no more than one of Z4, Z5 and Z6 is chosen from O and S. It will be apparent that any CH or NH at Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5 and/or Z6 may be substituted with a substituent represented by RA or R2, and that such substitution with result in the replacement of the hydrogen atom with a substituent represented by RA or R2. In certain compounds in which the variable R3 is present, each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1^alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl. Within certain compounds of Formulas A and III, RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-Qhydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-Cealkyl ether, (mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino)C0- C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl and C1- C4haloalkyl. Representative such RA groups include (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyL C1-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-Qalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle, wherein the 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl or chosen from
Figure imgf000034_0001
Within certain compounds of Formula III (or the subformulas thereof), one or more of the following conditions applies: (a) R2 represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C1-Cealkyl and C1-C6haloalkyl;
(b) V is methylene or ethylene, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and substituents that are taken together, with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
(c) V is methylene;
(d) Y is C3-C16cycloalkyl, 6- to 10-membered aryl or 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-
Cehydroxyalkyl, C1-Cόalkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino;
(e) Y is phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; each of which is optionally fused to a 5- to
7-membered carbocycle or to a 5- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which phenyl, heteroaryl, carbocycle and heterocycle is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl,
C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino; and/or
(f) -W-V-C(R5)(Rs)-Y is:
Figure imgf000034_0002
Figure imgf000035_0001
wherein:
Figure imgf000035_0002
i.s phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., pyridyl, pyrazolyl or pyrimidinyl); J and K are independently CH or N;
Ri represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-
C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-
C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; or two substituents represented by Ri are taken together, with any intervening ring atoms, to form a fused
4- to 7-membered carbocycle or a fused 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; Each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R5 are taken together with the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3- Cgcycloalkyl; and Each R5a is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R5a are taken together with the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3- C8cycloalkyl.
Within these formulas and others in which the variables J and K appear, if J or K is
CH, the carbon atom at that ring position may optionally be substituted with a substituent represented by R1. For example, if both J and K are CH, substituents represented by Ri may be present at any of positions 2-6 of the resulting phenyl moiety (with position 1 being the point of attachment to C(R5)(R5)).
Representative subformulas of Formula III include, for example:
Figure imgf000035_0003
Figure imgf000036_0001
or , wherein R3 is as described above.
Within certain such compounds, each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino. Within further such compounds, each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl.
Representative subformulas of Formulas IV and V include, for example:
Figure imgf000036_0002
wherein each R3 is as described above. Within certain such compounds, each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- Qaminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino. Within further such compounds, each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl.
Within certain compounds of Formulas IV and V, and subformulas thereof, RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, d-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- Cealkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- Cealkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl. In certain such compounds, the (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl (which is unsubstituted or substituted as described above) is thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl or pyridazinyl.
Within certain compounds of Formulas IV and V, and subformulas thereof, Y is phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and R4 is hydrogen or C1-C4alkyl. hi certain such compounds, -X-Y is:
Figure imgf000037_0001
wherein J and K are independently CH or N; Ri represents from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino; and each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyL, C3-C7cycloalkyl, phenyl, or taken together with another R5 attached to the same carbon atom, and the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a Cs-Cgcycloalkyl.
Certain compounds of Formula V further satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000037_0002
wherein RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, Q-C6alkenyl, C1- Qhaloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haIoalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-Cόalkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl; J and K are independently CH or N; Ri represents from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1- C4alkyl or
Figure imgf000038_0001
and each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3- C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or two R5 are taken together with the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl.
Within certain compounds of Formula IV, V or VI, and subformulas thereof, at least one R5 is not hydrogen (e.g., both R5 are taken together with the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3-Cgcycloalkyl).
Within certain compounds of Formula VI, R3 is hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1- C4haloalkyl.
Within further compounds of Formula VI, -W-X-Y is:
Figure imgf000038_0002
wherein J and K are independently CH or N; Ri represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino; and each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl.
Certain compounds of Formulas III- VI further satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000039_0001
Within certain compounds of Formula VI, RA is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino and halogen; and (ii) C1-Q,alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C^aloalkyl. Within other compounds of Formula VI, RA is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino and halogen; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-Q,haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
Certain compounds of Formula VI further satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000039_0002
wherein: m is 0 or 1 ; Y is:
Figure imgf000040_0001
J and K are independently CH or N; Ri represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-Cvcycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; R3 is hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl; Each R5 is independently (i) hydrogen; (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or phenyl; or (iii) taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii) or (iii) is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chose from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl C1- C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and
4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and
RA is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) 0x0, amino and halogen; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C,-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl. Within certain compounds, one R5 moiety is a N-linked 5- or 6-membered heterocycloalkyl group (e.g., piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperidinyl or pyrrolidinyl), each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with one substituent such as hydroxy, halogen, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl. Within certain compounds of Formula VII, V is absent or methylene. Within further
compounds of Formula VII,
Figure imgf000040_0002
represents pyrazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole or thiophene.
Certain compounds of Formula VII further satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000041_0001
wherein Z1, Z2 and Z3 are independently N, NH, CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z1, Z2 and Z3 is chosen from O and S. Certain such compounds satisfy one or more of the following formulas:
Figure imgf000041_0002
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-Cehaloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- Qalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
Other compounds of Formula VII further satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000041_0003
wherein Z4 and Z5 are independently CH, N, NH, O or S; and Z6 is CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z4, Z5 and Z6 is chosen from O and S. Certain such compounds further satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000042_0001
; wherein R3 is as described above.
Within certain embodiments of the above subformulas of Formula VII, each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl. Within further such subformulas, and within Formula VII, RA is as described above, or RA is C1-C6alkyl, C2- Qalkenyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C1- Cealkylaminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C1-C1alkylaminocarbonyl, mono- or di-C1- Cealkylaminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4haloalkyl, such that if
Figure imgf000042_0002
represents pyrazole or imidazole, then RA is not optionally substituted C1-C6alkoxy. Within certain such compounds, RA is C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, d-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-Cgalkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, and 5- or 6- membered heteroaryl. Within certain compounds of Formula VII and the subformulas thereof,
Figure imgf000042_0003
Figure imgf000043_0001
wherein: Rn and Ri2 are taken together, with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; and each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl. Certain such compounds further satisfy one of the following formulas:
Figure imgf000043_0002
Figure imgf000043_0003
wherein m is 0 or 1. Within certain sue the R5 moieties are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to foπn a C3-C8cycloalkyl.
Within certain compounds of Formula VIII, R3 is halogen, cyano, C1-C^aloalkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; and/or Y is piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently
Figure imgf000043_0004
chosen from C1-C6alkyl. hi further such compounds, is a group of the formula
Figure imgf000044_0001
; wherein x is 0, 1 or 2; and M is CH2, NH, S or O. Representative such compounds have the formula:
Figure imgf000044_0002
wherein Ri3 is hydrogen or C1-C4alkyl.
Within further compounds of Formula VIE, RA is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl. Within other such compounds, RA is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
Within certain compounds of Formula FX,
Figure imgf000044_0003
is pyrazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole or thiophene. Representative such compounds further satisfy the formula:
Figure imgf000045_0001
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-Cόalkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; within certain such compounds each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl. Representative RA moieties include, for example, phenylC0-C2alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, d-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, (mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino)C0- C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or (Ii-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C^aloalkyl. Representative
Y groups include, for example,
Figure imgf000045_0002
; in which J and K are independently CH or
N; and Ri represents from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, d-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino. Representative 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 1-3. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In addition, other forms such as hydrates and prodrugs of such compounds are specifically contemplated by the present invention.
Within certain aspects of the present invention, 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds provided herein detectably alter (modulate) P2X7 receptor activity, as determined using an assay such as an assay recited in Example 4, herein. Additional assays that may be used for this purpose include assays that measure IL- l β release; assays that measure uptake of a membrane-impermeant fluorescent dye such as YO-PROl; assays that measure lucifer yellow uptake; assays that measure ethidium bromide uptake; and assays that use calcium imaging to detect P2X7 activity; all of which assays are well known in the art. Certain modulators provided herein detectably modulate P2X7 receptor activity at micromolar concentrations, at nanomolar concentrations, or at subnanomolar concentrations.
As noted above, compounds that are P2X7 receptor antagonists are preferred within certain embodiments. IC50 values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro P2X7 receptor-mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 4. Briefly, cells expressing P2X7 receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration {e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3, Fluo-4 or Fura-2 (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to Cs^+). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution. Contact is maintained for an amount of time sufficient to allow the dye to enter the cells {e.g., 1-2 hours). Cells are washed or filtered to remove excess dye and are then contacted with a P2X7 receptor agonist {e.g., ATP or 2'(3')-O- (4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate at, for example, a concentration equal to the EC50 concentration), and a fluorescence response is measured. When agonist-contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a P2X7 receptor antagonist, the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound, hi certain embodiments, P2X7 receptor antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound equal to the IC5O. Certain such antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound that is 100-fold higher than the IC50. P2X7 receptor modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 5. Modulators provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on P2X7 receptor activity within such a functional assay. In certain embodiments, preferred modulators are non-sedating. In other words, a dose of modulator that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief (such as a model provided in Example 5, herein) causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than Vz the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49(2-3):433-9). Preferably, a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation. More preferably, a modulator provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
If desired, compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D. dosing, preferably T.I.D. dosing, more preferably B.I.D. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing). In addition, differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for modulators used to treat pain or neurodegenerative disease by modulating CNS P2X7 receptor activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent, while low brain levels of modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain or certain inflammatory diseases (e.g. rheumatoid arthritis) may be preferred (i.e., such doses do not provide brain (e.g., CSF) levels of the compound sufficient to significantly modulate P2X7 receptor activity). Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use. For example, assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers. Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously). Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays. Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described, for example, within Example 7 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
As noted above, preferred compounds provided herein are nontoxic. In general, the term "nontoxic" shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration ("FDA") for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans). In addition, a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes. As used herein, a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547. In other words, cells treated as described therein with 100 μM of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
A compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC5O for the compound. In certain preferred embodiments, a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals.
A compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05. 0.1, 0.5, I5 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally. Similarly, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 at P2X7 receptor for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory animals (e.g., rodents) by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. Alternatively, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC5O or IC50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP 1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 at P2X7 receptor for the compound.
Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
For detection purposes, as discussed in more detail below, modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled. For example, compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 11C, 13C, 14C, 15N, 18O, 170, 31P, 32P, 35S, 18F and 36Cl. hi addition, substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
PREPARATION OF 5-MEMBERED HETEROCYCLIC AMIDES AND RELATED COMPOUNDS 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, MO), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. In some cases, protecting groups may be required during preparation. Such protecting groups can be removed by methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as methods described in Greene and Wuts, "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis" (2nd Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, 1991). In some cases, further organic transformations may be performed using methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as methods described in Richard C. Larock, "Comprehensive Organic Transformation," (VCH Publisher, Inc. 1989).
Each variable in the following Schemes refers to any group consistent with the description of the compounds provided herein. In schemes with more than one R3 variable, it will be apparent that (as in the Formulas provided elsewhere herein) each R3 is independently chosen.
Certain abbreviations used in the following Schemes and elsewhere herein include: Ac acetyl
ACN acetonitrile
BOP benzotriazol- 1 -yloxytris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate δ chemical shift
DCM dichloromethane DIEA diisopropylethylamine
DMC 2-chloro-l,3-dimethyl-4,5-dihydro-3H-imidazolium chloride
DMF dimethylformamide
DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
Et ethyl EtOAc ethyl acetate
EtOH ethanol h hour(s)
1H NMR proton nuclear magnetic resonance
HOBt hydroxybenzotriazole Hz hertz
LAH lithium aluminum hydride
LC/MS liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry
MeOH methanol min minute(s) (M+ 1) mass + 1
NMP n-methylpyrrolidone
Pd(PPIi3)4 tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) PTLC preparative thin layer chromatography
RT room temperature
TEA triethylamine
TFA trifluoroacetic acid
THF tetrahydrofuran
TMS trimethylsilyl xantphos 9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000051_0001
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000051_0002
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000052_0001
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000052_0002
Scheme 5
Figure imgf000052_0003
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000053_0001
Scheme 6 illustrates the preparation of certain compounds provided herein that have a thiazole core. Thiazole 5-carboxylic acid ester is made by condensing carbothioic acid amide 1 and 2-halogen-3-oxo-carboxylic acid ester. Hydrolysis of the ester followed by amination of the resulting acid generates the desired product.
Scheme 7
Figure imgf000053_0002
Scheme 7 illustrates a general route for the preparation of certain compounds provided herein that have a thiazole core. Condensation of thiourea and the 2-halogen-3-oxo- carboxylic acid ester generates the 2-aminothiazole, which is converted to the bromothiazole via Sandermyer reaction. The bromothiazole can be either coupled to an organometallic compound under transition metal catalyzed reaction conditions, such as a boronic acid under Suzuki condition or an organostannane under Stille reaction condition, or condensed directly with a heterocycle to give the thiazole ester. Hydrolysis of the thiazole ester followed by amination of the resulting acid generates the desired product. Scheme 8
Figure imgf000054_0001
Scheme 8 illustrates a general method for preparing certain compounds provided herein that have a thiazole core. Protection of the 2-aminothiazole 5-carboxylic acid ester by t-Boc, followed by hydrolysis, amination, deprotection, and Sandermyer reaction generates the bromothiazole. The desired product is prepared by coupling the bromothiazole with an organometallic compound under transition metal catalyzed reaction conditions or by condensing the bromothiazole directly with a heterocycle.
Scheme 9
Figure imgf000054_0002
Figure imgf000054_0003
Scheme 10
Figure imgf000055_0001
Scheme 11
R
Figure imgf000055_0002
Scheme 12
Figure imgf000056_0001
Scheme 13
Figure imgf000056_0002
Scheme 14
Figure imgf000056_0003
In Scheme 14, a thiophene carboxylic acid is reacted with an amine in the presence of a base such as TEA and a dehydrating agent such as 2-chloro-l,3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide.
Scheme 15
Figure imgf000057_0001
Scheme 15 illustrates a general method for preparing compounds of Formula X. Curtius rearrangement of the acid generates the amino intermediate, which provides the compound of Formula X upon amination.
Scheme 16
Figure imgf000057_0003
Scheme 16 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH2-CH2- CHR5-Y of Formula X wherein R5 is substituted phenyl or heteroaryl and Y = N-R5bR5b wherein R5b is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyL or C3-C7cycloalkyl; or both R5b are taken together to form a heterocycle. Strecker condensation of the aryl carboxaldehyde and amine either with TMSCN in a solvent such as acetonitrile, or with NaCN or KCN in a solvent such MeOH- water or water at pH 3-4 (adjusted by hydrogen chloride) gives the aminonitrile, which is reduced by LAH in a solvent such as THF or by hydrogenation with Raney Nickel as a catalyst in a solvent such as 7N ammonia in methanol to give the amine intermediate NH2- CH2-CHR5-Y.
Scheme 17
Figure imgf000057_0002
Scheme 17 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH2-CH2-
CHR5-Y or NH2-CH2-CR5R5-Y of Formula X wherein Y is substituted phenyl or heteroaryl.
Alkylation of the starting acetonitrile with one equivalent of X-R5 (X = Br or I), with base such as sodium hydride in a solvent such as THF-DMSO gives intermediate Y-X(R5)-CN. Alkylation of the starting acetonitrile with two equivalents of X-R5 (X=Br or I) or one equivalent of dibromo or diiodo (when R5 and R5 are taken together to form a ring) with base such as sodium hydride in a solvent such as THF-DMSO gives intermediate Y-X(R5)(R5)-CN.
Reduction of either product by LAH in a solvent such as THF or by hydrogenation with
Raney Nickel as a catalyst in a solvent such as 7N ammonia in methanol provides NH2-CH2- CHR5-Y or NH2-CH2-CR5R5-Y.
Scheme 18
Figure imgf000058_0001
Scheme 18 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH2-CH2- CR5R5-Y of Formula X wherein R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R5 are taken together to form a Cs-Cgcycloalkyl or heterocycle, and Y=N- R5bR-5b wherein R5b is C1-C6 alkyl, optionally substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy or CO2H, or both R5b are taken together to form a 5- to 7-membered heterocycle. Strecker condensation of the ketone and amine either with TMSCN in a solvent such methanol with a catalyst such as ZnI2, or with NaCN or KCN in a solvent such MeOH- water or water at pH 3-4 (adjusted by hydrogen chloride) gives the aminonitrile. Reduction of the aminonitrile by LAH in a solvent such as THF or by hydrogenation with Raney Nickel as a catalyst in a solvent such as 7N ammonia in methanol gives NH2-CH2-CR5R5-Y. hi certain embodiments, a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms. Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms. As noted above, all stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms). Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope. Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14C), hydrogen (e.g., 3H), sulfur (e.g., 35S) or iodine (e.g., 125I). Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous- catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate. In addition, certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate. Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient. Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., sodium bicarbonate, neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose, starch, mannitol or dextrans), proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives. In addition, other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
Pharmaceutical compositions may be foπnulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique, hi certain embodiments, compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs. Within yet other embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a lyophilizate. Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch). Formulation for direct administration into the bladder (intravesicular administration) may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder. Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations. Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. Such excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate). Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and/or one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations. Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present. Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate). An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components. Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery. Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols (e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols (e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices. A composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials. Examples of such components are described in Martindale~The Extra Pharmacopoeia (Pharmaceutical Press, London 1993) and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, PA (2005). Formulations may comprise microcapsules, such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
A topical formulation may be prepared in any of a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions. The physical appearance and viscosity of such pharmaceutically acceptable forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjusters) present in the formulation. Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsifϊers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity. These formulations, like those of lotions and creams, may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers. Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate. Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate. A gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate. Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants. For example, one or more of dimethicone copolyol, polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG- dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations. Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate. Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol. Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils. Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5. Other suitable additional ingredients that may be included a topical formulation include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants. An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%). An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight.
Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing. A pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectible aqueous or oleaginous suspension. The compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle. Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. hi addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration). Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non- irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug. Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
Compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for release at a pre-determined rate. Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract). Controlled release formulations (i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration) may be administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at a target site. In general, a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period. One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate. Preferably, the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours. Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled-release coating. The release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
The matrix material, which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s). For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed. Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet). Alternatively, or in addition, active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying. Optionally, additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution). The matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
In certain embodiments, a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium). The controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free. Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body). It will be apparent that multiple coatings may be employed (e.g., to allow release of a portion of the dose in the stomach and a portion further along the gastrointestinal tract). For example, a portion of active ingredient(s) may be coated over an enteric coating, and thereby released in the stomach, while the remainder of active ingredient(s) in the matrix core is protected by the enteric coating and released further down the GI tract. pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
In certain embodiments, the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration. Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing. Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, hie, West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions. Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EIIDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The physical properties of coatings that comprise an aqueous dispersion of a hydrophobic material may be improved by the addition or one or more plasticizers. Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin. Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion. If desired, the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use. Certain such pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses {e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers {e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water- soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts. Alternatively, or in addition, a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology {see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
Further examples of controlled release formulations, and components thereof, may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of controlled release dosage forms. In addition to or together with the above modes of administration, a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water {e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock). Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
Compounds are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount. Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day {e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses {e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated, the particular mode of administration and any other co-administered drugs. Dosage units generally contain between from about 10 μg to about 500 mg of active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art. Pharmaceutical compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to
P2X7 receptor modulation (e.g., pain, inflammation, neurodegeneration or other condition described herein). Packaged pharmaceutical compositions generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein and (ii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in the patient.
METHODS OF USE
P2X7 receptor modulators provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of P2X7 receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo. Within certain aspects, P2X7 receptor antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of ligand agonist to P2X7 receptor in vitro or in vivo. In general, such methods comprise the step of contacting a P2X7 receptor with one or more P2X7 receptor modulators provided herein, in the presence of ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to P2X7 receptor. The modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 4). The P2X7 receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell. Within certain embodiments, the P2X7 receptor is expressed by a cell that is present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid. Preferably, one or more modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 20 micromolar or less, 10 micromolar or less, 5 micromolar or less, or 1 micromolar or less. For example, such compounds may be administered at a therapeutically effective dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg. Also provided herein are methods for modulating, preferably reducing, cellular P2X7 receptor activation and/or activity, such as signal-transducing activity (e.g., calcium conductance). Such modulation may be achieved by contacting a P2X7 receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with one or more modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor. The modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction as described herein. The receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient. For example, the cell may be contacted in vivo in an animal. Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux). Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain or inflammation) of a patient being treated with one or more modulators provided herein.
P2X7 receptor modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating P2X7 receptor signal-transducing activity. The present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to
P2X7 receptor modulation. Within the context of the present invention, the term "treatment" encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms). A condition is "responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation" if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a P2X7 receptor, regardless of the amount of P2X7 agonist present locally, and/or if modulation of P2X7 receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof. Such conditions include, for example, pain, inflammation, cardiovascular disorders, neurodegenerative disorders and respiratory disorders (such as cough, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, cystic fibrosis and rhinitis, including allergic rhinitis, such as seasonal an perennial rhinitis, and non-allergic rhinitis), fibrosis as well as other conditions described in more detail below. Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated; however, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy, hi general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
Pain that may be treated using the modulators provided herein includes, for example, acute, chronic, inflammatory, and neuropathic pain. Specific pain indications that may be treated as described herein include, but are not limited to, pain associated with osteoarthritis or rheumatoid arthritis; various neuropathic pain syndromes (such as post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, diabetic neuropathy, Guillian Barre syndrome, fibromyalgia, oral neuropathic pain, phantom limb pain, post-mastectomy pain, peripheral neuropathy, myofascial pain syndromes, MS-related neuropathy, HIV or AIDS- related neuropathy, and chemotherapy-induced and other iatrogenic neuropathies); visceral pain, (such as that associated with gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD), irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, pancreatitis, intestinal gas, gynecological disorders (e.g., menstrual pain, dysmenorrhea, pain associated with cystitis, labor pain, chronic pelvic pain, chronic prostitis, endometriosis, heart pain and abdominal pain), and urological disorders); dental pain (e.g., toothache, denture pain, nerve root pain, pain resulting from periodontal disease, and pain due to dental surgery including operative and post-operative pain); headache (e.g., headaches involving peripheral nerve activity, sinus headache, cluster headache (i.e., migranous neuralgia) tension headache, migraine, temporomandibular pain and maxillary sinus pain); stump pain; meralgia paresthetica; burning-mouth syndrome; pain associated with nerve and root damage, including as pain associated with peripheral nerve disorders (e.g., nerve entrapment and brachial plexus avulsions, amputation, peripheral neuropathies including bilateral peripheral neuropathy, tic douloureux, atypical facial pain, nerve root damage, and arachnoiditis), causalgia, neuritis (including, for example, sciatic neuritis, peripheral neuritis, polyneuritis, optic neuritis, postfebrile neuritis, migrating neuritis, segmental neuritis and Gombault's neuritis), neuronitis, neuralgias (e.g., those mentioned above, cervicobrachial neuralgia, cranial neuralgia, geniculate neuralgia, glossopharyngial neuralgia, migranous neuralgia, idiopathic neuralgia, intercostals neuralgia, mammary neuralgia, mandibular joint neuralgia, Morton's neuralgia, nasociliary neuralgia, occipital neuralgia, red neuralgia, Sluder's neuralgia, splenopalatine neuralgia, supraorbital neuralgia and vidian neuralgia); surgery-related pain; musculoskeletal pain; central nervous system pain (e.g., pain due to brain stem damage, sciatica, and ankylosing spondylitis); and spinal pain, including spinal cord injury-related pain.
Further pain conditions that can be treated as described herein include Charcot's pains, ear pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain (e.g., odontalgia), carpel tunnel syndrome, acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, "non-painful" neuropathies, complex regional pain syndrome, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain - including pain associated with carcinoma, often referred to as cancer-associated pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma-associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, episiotomy pain, pain from cuts, musculoskeletal pain, bruises and broken bones, and burn pain, especially primary hyperalgesia associated therewith). Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with autoimmune diseases or immunodeficiency disorders, hot flashes, burns, sunburn, and pain that results from exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli.
Conditions associated with inflammation and/or immune system disorders that may be treated using the modulators provided herein include, but are not limited to, arthritis (including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, Reiter's syndrome, gout, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, gouty arthritis and juvenile arthritis); cystic fibrosis; uveitis; systemic lupus erythematosus (and associated glomerulonephritis); spondyloarthropathies; psoriasis; scleritis; allergic conditions (including allergic reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic contact hypersensitivity, allergic dermatitis, eczema and contact dermatitis), reperfusion injury (e.g., cardiac and renal reperfusion injury), respiratory system disorders (including hyper-responsiveness of the airway, cough, asthma (e.g., to prevent or decrease the severity of both acute early phase asthma attack and the late phase reactions that follow such an asthma attack; including bronchial, allergic, intrinsic, extrinsic, exercise-induced, drug-induced (e.g., aspirin or NSAID-induced) and dust-induced asthma), reactive airway disease, emphysema, acute (adult) respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), bronchitis (e.g., infectious and eosinophilic bronchitis), bronchiectasis, chronic pulmonary obstructive disorder (COPD), chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, silicosis, pulmonary sarcoidosis, farmer's lung, hypersensitivity pneumonitis and lung fibrosis), viral infection, fungal infection, bacterial infection, Crohn's disease, glomerulornephritis, HTV infection and AIDS, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, dermatomyositis, multiple sclerosis, pemphigus, pemphigoid, scleroderma, myasthenia gravis, autoimmune hemolytic and thrombocytopenic states, Goodpasture's syndrome (and associated glomerulonephritis and pulmonary hemorrhage), tissue graft rejection, hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs, allograft rejection, organ transplant toxicity, neutropenia, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, conjunctivitis shock, toxic shock syndrome, Alzheimer's disease, inflammation associated with severe burns, lung injury, systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS), neonatal-onset multisystem inflammatory disease (NOMID), Hashimoto's thyroiditis, Grave's disease, Addison's disease, idiopathic thrombocytopaenic purprua, eosinophilic fascitis, hyper-IgE syndrome, antiphospholipid syndrome, leprosy, Sezary syndrome, paraneoplastic syndromes, Muckle- Wells syndrome, lichen planus, familial cold autoinflammatory syndrome (FCAS), colitis, ruptured abdominal aortic aneurysm and multiple organ dysfunction syndrome (MODS). Also included are pathologic sequellae associated with insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (including diabetic retinopathy), lupus nephropathy, Heyman nephritis, membranous nephritis and other forms of glomerulonephritis, macular degeneration, contact sensitivity responses, and inflammation resulting from contact of blood with artificial surfaces as occurs, for example, during extracorporeal circulation of blood (e.g., during hemodialysis or via a heart-lung machine, for example, in association with vascular surgery such as coronary artery bypass grafting or heart valve replacement) such as extracorporeal post-dialysis syndrome, or in association with contact with other artificial vessel or container surfaces (e.g., ventricular assist devices, artificial heart machines, transfusion tubing, blood storage bags, plasmapheresis, plateletpheresis, and the like).
Still further conditions that may be treated using the modulators provided herein include:
Cardiovascular disorders, such as cardiovascular disease, stroke, cerebral ischemia, myocardial infarction, atherosclerosis, ischemic heart disease, ischemia-reperfusion injury, aortic aneurysm, and congestive heart failure;
Neurological disorders (e.g., neurodegeneration), such as neurodegenerative conditions associated with progressive CNS disorders, including, but not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, Creutzfeldt- Jakob disease, dementia with Lewy bodies, traumatic brain injury, spinal cord injury, neurotrauma, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, and encephalitis; epilepsy and seizure disorders; multiple sclerosis and other demyelinating syndromes; cerebral atherosclerosis; vasculitis; temporal arteritis; myasthenia gravis; neurosarcoidosis; and central and peripheral nervous system complications of malignant, infectious or autoimmune processes; the modulators provided herein may also be used to promote neuroregeneration; Centrally-mediated neuropsychiatric disorders, such as depression, depression mania, bipolar disease, anxiety, schizophrenia, eating disorders, sleep disorders and cognition disorders; Obesity (e.g., the modulator may be used to promote weight loss in an obese patient); and Other disorders, such as cirrhosis, interstitial fibrosis, prostate, bladder and bowel dysfunction (e.g., urinary incontinence, urinary hesitancy, rectal hypersensitivity, fecal incontinence and benign prostatic hypertrophy); itch/pruritus; obesity; lipid disorders; cancer; hypertension; renal disorders; abnormal wound healing; myoblastic leukemia; diabetes; meningitis; varicose veins; muscle degeneration; cachexia; restenosis; thrombosis; cerebral malaria; disorders of bones and joints (e.g., osteoporosis, bone resorption disease, loosening of artificial joint implants, and others listed above); epidermolysis bullosa; ocular angiogenesis; corneal injury; corneal scarring; and tissue ulceration. Within other aspects, modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation (e.g., conditions involving pain and/or inflammatory components). Such conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs. Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebro- vascular disease and certain infectious diseases. Within such combination therapy, a modulator is administered to a patient along with a second therapeutic agent (e.g., an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent). The modulator and second therapeutic agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order. Anti-inflammatory agents include, for example, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX- 2) specific cyclooxgenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, leflunomide, cyclosporine A, IM gold, minocycline, azathioprine, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, soluble TNF alpha receptor (etanercept), anti-TNF alpha antibodies (e.g., infliximab and adalimumab), anti-C5 antibodies, interleukin-1 (IL-I) receptor antagonists (e.g., anakinra or IL-I trap), IL- 18 binding protein, CTLA4-Ig (e.g., abatacept), anti-human DL-6 receptor monoclonal antibody (e.g., tocilizumab), LFA-3-Ig fusion proteins (e.g., alefacept), LFA-I antagonists, anti-VLA4 monoantibody (e.g., natalizumab), anti- CDl Ia monoclonal antibody, anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody (e.g., rituximab), anti-IL-12 monoclonal antibody, anti-IL-15 monoclonal antibody, CDP 484, CDP 870, chemokine receptor antagonists, selective iNOS inhibitors, p38 kinase inhibitors, integrin antagonists, angiogenesis inhibitors, and TMI-I dual inhibitors. Further anti-inflammatory agents include meloxicam, rofecoxib, celecoxib, etoricoxib, parecoxib, valdecoxib and tilicoxib.
NSAIDs include, but are not limited to, ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, naproxen or naproxen sodium, diclofenac, combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol, sulindac, oxaprozin, diflunisal, piroxicam, indomethacin, etodolac, fenoprofen calcium, ketoprofen, sodium nabumetone, sulfasalazine, tolmetin sodium, and hydroxychloroquine. One class of NSAIDs consists of compounds that inhibit cyclooxygenase (COX) enzymes; such compounds include celecoxib and rofecoxib. NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates, and salsalate, as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone.
Suitable dosages for P2X7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount). Thus, preferably, the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a modulator. More preferably this dosage is less than 3A, even more preferably less than 1A, and highly preferably, less than 1A of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the antiinflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a modulator. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of modulator component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be reduced by the co-administraction of the anti-inflammatory agent. In certain preferred embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents. Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like). In certain embodiments, the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more modulators and one or more antiinflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition.
Within further aspects, modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications. Certain such medications are also antiinflammatory agents, and are listed above. Other such medications are analgesic agents, including narcotic agents which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., μ, K and/or δ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists. Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof. Specific examples of narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanil, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, nalbuphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan, racemorphan, sulfentanyl, thebaine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates of the foregoing agents.
Other examples of narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonitazene, etorphine, etoxeridine, furethidine, hydromorphinol, hydroxypethidine, ketobemidone, levomoramide, levophenacylmorphan, methyldesrrphine, methyldihydromorphine, morpheridine, morphine, methylpromide, morphine methylsulfonate, morphine-N-oxide, myrophin, naloxone, naltyhexone, nicocodeine, nicomorphine, noracymethadol, norlevorphanol, normethadone, normorphine, norpipanone, pentazocaine, phenadoxone, phenampromide, phenomorphan, phenoperidine, piritramide, pholcodine, proheptazoine, properidine, propiran, racemoramide, thebacon, trimeperidine and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
Further specific representative analgesic agents include, for example acetaminophen (paracetamol); aspirin and other NSAIDs described above; NR2B antagonists; bradykinin antagonists; anti-migraine agents; anticonvulsants such as oxcarbazepine and carbamazepine; antidepressants (such as TCAs, SSRIs, SNRIs, substance P antagonists, etc.); spinal blocks; pentazocine/naloxone; meperidine; levorphanol; buprenorphine; hydromorphone; fentanyl; sufentanyl; oxycodone; oxycodone/acetaminophen, nalbuphine and oxymorphone. Still further analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AM1241, capsaicin receptor antagonists and compounds that bind to the α2δ subunit of voltage-gated calcium channels, such as gabapentin and pregabalin.
Representative anti-migraine agents for use in combination with a modulator provided herein include CGRP antagonists, capsaicin receptor antagonists, ergotamines and 5- HTi agonists, such as sumatripan, naratriptan, zolmatriptan and rizatriptan.
Within still further aspects, modulators provided herein may be used, for example, in the treatment of pulmonary disorders such as asthma, in combination with one or more beta(2)-adrenergic receptor agonists or leukotriene receptor antagonists (e.g., agents that inhibits the cysteinyl leukotriene CySLT1 receptor). CysLTi antagonists include montelukast, zafirlukast, and pranlukast. .
Suitable dosages for P2X7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than 3A, less than 1A, less than % or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer). For use in combination therapy, pharmaceutical compositions as described above may further comprise one or more additional medications as described above. In certain such compositions, the additional medication is an analgesic. Also provided herein are packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprising one or more modulators and one or more additional medications (e.g., analgesics) in the same package. Such packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein; (ii) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one additional medication (such as a pain relief and/or anti-inflammatory medication) as described above and (iii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the compositions are to be used simultaneously, separately or sequentially for treating or preventing a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in the patient (such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates).
Within separate aspects, the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the modulator compounds provided herein. For example, such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of P2X7 receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof). In addition, modulators provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group (such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group) may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites. In addition, modulators provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity or as radiotracers (e.g., in receptor mapping procedures). For example, a modulator compound may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and used as a probe for receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of P2X7 receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples, which may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York, which sections are incorporated herein by reference. Such receptor mapping procedures also include methods that can be used to characterize P2X7 receptor in living subjects, such as positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT). The following Examples are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. Unless otherwise specified all reagents and solvent are of standard commercial grade and are used without further purification. Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein.
EXAMPLES
Mass spectroscopy data provided herein is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode. Unless otherwise specified, such data is obtained using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp.), Waters 996 photodiode array detector (Waters Corp.), and a Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, WI). MassLynx™ (Waters Corp.) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx Global Server™, OpenLynx™ and AutoLynx™ processing is used for data collection and analysis. MS conditions are as follows: capillary voltage = 3.5 kV; cone voltage = 30 V, desolvation and source temperature = 350°C and 12O°C, respectively; mass range = 181-750 with a scan time of 0.22 seconds and an interscan delay of 0.05 seconds.
Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50x4.6mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP- 18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 mL/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340 nm UV range. The elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A - 95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B - 5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA. The following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min 10-100%B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 min, return to 10%B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min. Where indicated, retention times (Rτ) are provided in minutes.
EXAMPLE 1 Preparation of Representative 5-Membered Heterocyclic Amides and Related Compounds
This Example illustrates the preparation of representative 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds, as well as certain intermediates useful in the preparation of such compounds. Mass spectroscopy characterization data is obtained as described above. A
"*IC5o" after the mass spectroscopy data provided for a compound indicates that the IC50 determined as described in Example 4A is 2 micromolar or less (i.e., the concentration of the compound that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to 80 μM of (2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate is 2 micromolar or less). A. N-(ADAMANTAN- 1 -YLMETHYL)- 1 -(4-AMINO-5-FLUOROPYRIMIDIN-2-YL)-3 - (TRIFLUOROMETHYL)- lH-PYRAZOLE-4-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 1)
Step 1. Trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000077_0001
NaOH (3 mL, 10 N) is added to a solution of 3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4- carboxylic acid ethyl ester (5.0 g, 24 mmol) in MeOH (25 mL) at RT. The mixture is heated to 40 °C for 3 h. The solvent is removed to dryness. H2O is added. The solution is acidified with 2N HCl to pH = 6 to afford the title compound as an off-white solid.
Step 2. 3-Trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan-l-ylmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000077_0002
BOP (2.6 g, 5.8 mmol) is added to a solution of 3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4- carboxylic acid (1.0 g, 5.55 mmol), admantan-1-yl-methylamine (959 mg, 5.8 mmol), HOBt (200 mg, 1.4 mmol) and DIEA (1.1 mL, 6.5 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) at RT. The mixture is stirred for 14 h. The mixture is poured into a sat. NH4Cl (450 mL) and filtered to afford the title compound as a white solid.
Step 3. l-(4-Amino-5-fluoro-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethy l)-amide
Figure imgf000077_0003
A solution of 3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1- ylmethyl)-amide (100 mg, 0.306 mmol), 2-chloro-5-fluoro-pyrimidin-4-ylamine (52 mg, 0.35 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (130 mg, 0.4 mmol) in NMP (1.0 mL) is heated in a microwave reactor at
150 °C for 1 h. The mixture is poured into H2O. The crude product is filtered out, dissolved in 10% MeOH in DCM, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The title compound is purified by
PTLC (eluted with 5% MeOH in DCM). 1H NMR (CD3OD): 8.96 (s, IH), 8.1 l(s, IH), 3.0 (s, 2H), 1.98 (m, 3H), 1.78-1.68 (m, 6H), 1.58 (s, 6H). MS (M+l) = 439.29; Rτ = 1.34 min.
*IC50. B. l-(4-AMINO-5-FLUOROPYRIMIDIN-2 -YL)-N-(Q -(PYMDIN-S-YL)CYCLOHEXYL)METHYL)- 3 -(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)- 1H-PYRAZOLE-4-CARBOXAMTOE (COMPOUND 2)
Step 1. Ethyl l-(4-amino-5-fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-3 -(trifluoromethyl)- lH-pyrazole-4- carboxylate
Figure imgf000078_0001
A solution of ethyl 3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (150 mg, 0.72 mmol), 2-chloro-5-fluoro-pyrimidin-4-ylamine (102 mg, 0.79 mmol) and CS2CO3 (325 mg, 1 mmol) in NMP (1.0 mL) is heated in a microwave reactor at 150 °C for 1 h. The mixture is poured into H2O. The crude product is filtered out, dissolved in 10% MeOH in DCM, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. The title compound is purified by PTLC (eluted with 5% MeOH in DCM).
Step 2. 1 -(4-Amino-5 -fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-3 -(trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000078_0002
A solution of ethyl l-(4-amino-5-fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)-lH- pyrazole-4-carboxylate (269 mg, 0.84 mmol) and NaOH (2 mL, 10N) in MeOH is heated to 45 °C for 2 h. The solvent is removed to dryness. H2O is added. The solution is acidified with 2N HCl to pH = 5, to afford the title compound as an off-white solid.
Step 3. 1 -(4-amino-5-fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-N-(( 1 -(pyridin-3 -yl)cyclohexyl)methyl)-3 - (trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-pyrazole-4-carboxamide
Figure imgf000078_0003
BOP (18 mg, 0.04 mmol) is added to a solution of l-(4-ammo-5-fluoro-pyrimidin-2- yl)-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (10 mg, 0.03 mmol), (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexyl)-methylamine (8 mg, 0.04 mmol), HOBt (2 mg, 0.01 mmol) and DIEA (1.7 μL, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (0.2 mL) at rt. The mixture is stirred for 4 h. H2O is added. The mixture is extracted with 5% MeOH in DCM and dried over Na2SO4. The crude product is purified by PTLC (eluted with 5% MeOH in DCM) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CD3OD): 8.81 (s, IH), 8.59(b, IH), 8.38 (b, IH), 8.10 (m, IH), 7.94-7.92 (d, IH), 7.43 (b, IH), 2.31- 2.28 (b, 2H), 1.76-1.55 (m, 4H), 1.45-1.28 (m, 6H). MS (M+l) = 464.27; Rτ = 1.11 min.
*ic50.
C. 3-(DLFLUOROMETHYL)-L-(5-FLUORO-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL)-LH-PYRAZOLE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID (ADAMANTAN-I -YLMETHYL)-AMIDE (COMPOUND 3)
Step 1. Ethyl 3-(difluoromethyl)-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000079_0001
A mixture of ethyl 4,4-difluoro-3-oxobutanoate (4.65 g, 0.028 moles), acetic anhydride (8.0 g, 0.078 moles) and triethylorthoformate (7.3 g, 0.049 moles) is heated at 110 °C for 4 h. The mixture is concentrated under vacuum to afford (Z)-ethyl 2-
(ethoxymethylene)-4,4-difluoro-3-oxobutanoate as yellow oil. The oil is dissolved in EtOH
(25 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. To this cooled stirred mixture is added anhydrous hydrazine (0.7 mL, 0. 022 mole) and the mixture is allowed to warm gradually to RT overnight. The mixture is concentrated under vacuum and the crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography using 1-2 % MeOH / CH2Cl2 to afford the title compound as a yellow solid.
Step 2. Ethyl 3-(difluoromethyl)-l-(5-fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000079_0002
A solution of ethyl 3-(difluoromethyl)-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (190 mg, 1.0 mmol), 2-chloro-5-fluoro-pyrimidine (132 mg, 1.0 mmol) and K2CO3 (276 mg, 2.0 mmol) in NMP (2.0 mL) is heated in a microwave reactor at 150 °C for 1 h. The mixture is poured into H2O, extracted with EtOAc (3 x 25 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography using 15-25 % EtOAc / hexane to afford the title compound as a white solid.
Step 3. 3-(Difluoromethyl)-l-(5-fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000080_0001
A mixture of ethyl 3-(difluoromethyl)-l-(5-fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-lH-pyrazole-4- carboxylate (50 mg) and iodotrimethylsilane (1.0 mL) is heated at 90 °C for 4h. The mixture is concentrated under vacuum, quenched with ice, and sodium metabisulfite is added until the aqueous solution becomes colorless. The mixture is then extracted with EtOAc (3 x 10 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The dried extract is filtered and concentrated under vacuum to afford the title compound as white solid.
Step 4. 3-(Difluoromethyl)-l-(5-fluoro-pyrimidin-2-yl)-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000080_0002
BOP (98 mg, 0.22 mmol) is added to a solution of 3-(difluoromethyl)-l-(5- fluoropyrimidin-2-yl)-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (38 mg, 0.147 mmol), admantan-1-yl- methylamine (24 mg, 0.147 mmol) and DDEA (0.052 mL) in DMF (1.0 mL) at rt. The mixture is stirred for 20 h. The mixture is poured into ice water (5 mL), extracted with
EtOAc (3 x 20 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography using 30 % EtOAc / hexane to afford the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-D6): 9.45 (s, IH), 9.05(s, 2H), 8.35 (m, IH), 7.29-7.36 (t, IH),
2.93 (d, 2H), 1.91 (m, 3H), 1.47-1.65 (m, 12H). MS (M+l) = 406.28; Rτ = 1.34 min. *IC50.
D. N-(ADAMANTAN- 1 -YLMETHYL)-3 -METHYL- 1 -[5-METHYL-4-(MORPHOLIN-4-
YLCARBONYL) PYRIMIDIN-2-YL]-1H-PYRAZOLE-4-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 4)
Step 1. 3 -Methyl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000080_0003
BOP (3.53 g, 8 mmol) is added to a solution of adamantan-1-yl-methylamine (1.32 g, 8 mmol), 3 -methyl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (1 g, 7 mmol) and DIEA (2.6 g, 20 mmol) in DCM (25 mL). The solution is stirred overnight and evaporated, and then partitioned between EtOAc and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer is washed with brine, dried and evaporated. The residue is triturated with DCM and air-dried to give the title compound.
Step 2. l-(4-Amino-5-methyl-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-methyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -y lmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000081_0001
A mixture of 3-methyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- l-ylmethyl)-amide (1.6 g, 5.85 mmol), 4-amino-2-chloro-5-methylpyrimidine (924 mg, 6.4 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.6 g, 11.7 mmol) in DMSO (10 mL) is heated at 165 °C for 14 h. The mixture is cooled to RT and partitioned between EtOAc and water and separate the layers. The aqueous layer is extracted twice with further EtOAc. The extracts are combined, dried and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography eluting with a mixture of 7% MeOH and 1% TEA in DCM affords the title compound.
Step 3. l-(4-Bromo-5-methyl-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-methyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000081_0002
A mixture of tert-butyl nitrite (182 mg, 1.75 mmol) and copper(II)bromide (388 mg, 1.75 mmol) in ACN is heated to 60 °C and l-(4-amino-5-methyl-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-methyl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-amide (336 mg, 0.875 mmol) is added in portions. After heating for an additional 2 h, the mixture is cooled and partitioned between EtOAc and 10% aqueous ammonium hydroxide. The aqueous layer is extracted twice with further EtOAc. The extracts are combined, dried and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography, eluting with a mixture of 5% MeOH and 1% TEA in DCM, affords the title compound. Step 4. l-(4-Cyano-5-methyl-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-methyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000082_0001
A solution of l-(4-bromo-5-methyl-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-methyl-lH-pyrazole-4- carboxylic acid (adamantan- l-ylmethyl)-amide (1.05 g, 2.4 mmol), zinc cyanide (328 mg, 2.8 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (240 mg) in DMF (12 mL) is heated at 90 °C for 12 h. The mixture is cooled to RT and EtOAc and brine are added. The mixture is filtered through Celite, and the organic layer is separated, washed with brine, dried and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography, eluting with a mixture of 5% MeOH and 1% TEA in DCM, affords the title compound. MS (M+ 1) = 391.27; Rx = 1.34 min. *IC50.
Step 5. 2-{4-[(Adamantan-l-ylmethyl)-carbamoyl]-3-methyl-pyrazol-l-yl}-5-methyl- pyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000082_0002
A solution of l-(4-cyano-5-methyl-pyrimidin-2-yl)-3-methyl-lH-pyrazole-4- carboxylic acid (adamantan- l-ylmethyl)-amide (150 mg, 0.38 mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (1 mL) is heated at 80 °C overnight. The mixture is cooled to RT, water (3 mL) is added, and solid title compound is obtained by filtration and air-dried.
Step 6. N-(Adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-3 -methyl- 1 - [5 -methyl-4-(morpholin-4-ylcarbonyl) pyrimidin-2-yl]-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxamide
Figure imgf000082_0003
BOP (88 mg, 8 mmol) is added to a solution of 2-{4-[(adamantan-l-ylmethyl)- carbamoyl]-3-methyl-pyrazol-l-yl}-5-methyl-pyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid (41 mg, 0.1 mmol), morpholine (13 mg, 0.15 mmol) and DIEA (39 mg, 0.3 mmol) in DCM (3 mL). The solution is stirred overnight, evaporated and partitioned between EtOAc and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer is washed with brine, dried and evaporated. Purification by PTLC, eluting with a mixture of 5% MeOH and 1% TEA in DCM, affords the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.80 (s, IH), 8.65 (s, IH), 5.93 (s, IH), 3.81 (s, 4H), 3.63- 3.66 (m, IH), 3.46 (s, IH), 3.29 (t, IH), 3.10-3.15 (m, 2H), 2.85-2.90 (m, IH), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.31 (s, 3H), 1.99 (s, 3H), 1.53-1.73 (m, 12H). MS (M+l) = 479.37; Rτ = 1.30 min. *IC50.
E. N-(ADAMANTAN- 1 - YLMETHYL)-3 -METHOXY- 1 -PYRIMIDIN-2-YL- 1H-PYRAZOLE-4-
CARBOXAMiDE (COMPOUND 5)
Step 1. Ethyl 3 -hydroxy- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxy late
Figure imgf000083_0001
A solution of diethyl (ethoxymethylene)malonate (20 g, 92.5 mmol) in 200 mL of
EtOH is treated with hydrazine (2.9 mL, 92.5 mmol) by dropwise addition. After 10 min, 100 mL of 1 N NaOH is added (slightly exothermic), and the reaction mixture is stirred for a further 30 min. The EtOH is removed in vacuo, and the aqueous solution is diluted with a little more water and extracted with EtOAc. The aqueous phase is cooled to 0 °C and acidified to pH=5 with cone. HCl. The resulting precipitate is collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as an off-white solid.
Step 2. Ethyl l-acetyl-3 -hydroxy- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000083_0002
Acetic anhydride (1.2 mL, 12.8 mmol) is added to a suspension of ethyl 3-hydroxy- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (2.0 g, 12.8 mmol) in 30 mL of acetic acid. The reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 2 h. The solvent is removed in vacuo, and the remaining solid is washed with water, collected by vacuum filtration, and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.45 (IH, s), 8.27 (IH, bs), 4.38 (2H, q), 2.64 (3H, s), 1.38 (3H, t).
Step 3. Ethyl 3-methoxy-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000083_0003
A mixture of ethyl l-acetyl-3 -hydroxy- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (2.1 g, 10.6 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.5 g, 10.6 mmol) in 45 mL of DMF is stirred at RT for 30 minutes. Dimethyl sulfate (1.0 mL, 10.6 mmol) in 25 mL of DMF is then added dropwise over 10 min, and the resulting reaction mixture is heated to 70 °C for 4 h. The solvent is evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is dissolved in water and extracted with CH2CI2 (2 x 30 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a yellow/brown oil. Purification by silica gel column chromatography (gradient from 50% EtOAc/hexane to 80% EtOAc/hexane) affords the title compound as a clear, viscous oil which slowly solidifies on standing. Step 4. Ethyl 3-methoxy-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000084_0001
Sodium hydride (60% in mineral oil, 528 mg, 13.2 mmol) is added portion wise to a solution of ethyl 3-methoxy-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (1.5 g, 8.81 mmol) in 40 mL of THF at RT. Evolution of H2 (g) is observed. After about 5-10 min, 2-chloropyrirnidine (1.0 g, 8.81 mmol) is added, and the resulting reaction mixture is stirred at reflux for 15 h. After cooling to RT, the reaction is quenched with 10 mL of sat. NH4Cl and 10 mL of water and extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 x 40 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a brown solid. Purification by silica gel column chromatography (gradient from 50% EtOAc/hexane to EtOAc) affords the title compound as a fluffy white solid.
Step 5. 3-Methoxy-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000084_0002
A l N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (10 mL) is added to a slurry of ethyl 3- methoxy-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (1.1 mg, 4.43 mmol) in 30 mL of EtOH. The reaction mixture becomes homogeneous and is stirred for 2 h at RT. Water (2-3 mL) is added, and the solution is cooled to 0 °C and acidified to pH=2-3 with cone. HCl. Most of the EtOH is removed in vacuo, and the resultant mixture is filtered. The collected solid is dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid. Step 6. N-(Adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-3 -methoxy- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrazole-4- carboxamide
Figure imgf000085_0001
To a mixture of 3 -methoxy- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (40 mg, 0.18 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.063 mL, 0.36 mmol), 1- adamantan-1-ylmethan-amine (30 mg, 0.18 mmol) and BOP (97 mg, 0.22 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 18 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (5 mL). The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a brown solid. Purification by column chromatography (gradient from 80% EtO Ac/Hex to EtOAc) affords the title compound as a pale brown solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz,
CDCl3) δ 9.02 (IH, s), 8.74 (2H, d, J4.8), 7.19 (IH5 1, J4.8), 6.88 (IH, bs), 4.24 (3H, s), 3.12
(2H, d, J6.4), 2.00 (3H, bs), 1.60 (12H, m). MS (M+l) = 368.07; Rx = 1.65 min. *IC50.
F . N-(ADAMANTAN- 1 - YLMETHYL)-3 -AMINO- 1 -PYRIMIDIN-2-YL- 1 H-P YRAZOLE-4-
CARBOXAMiDE (COMPOUND 6) Step 1. Ethyl 3-amino-l-pyrirnidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000085_0002
Potassium tert-butoxide (2.4 g, 21.23 mmol) is added to a mixture of ethyl 3-amino- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (3.0 g, 19.3 mmol) and 2-chloropyrimidine (2.2 g, 19.3 mmol) in 50 mL of anhydrous dioxane. The reaction mixture is heated to 100 °C and stirred for 2 h. The solvent is removed in vacuo, and the residue is partitioned between EtOAc and water (50 mL each). The aqueous layer is extracted two more times with EtOAc (40 mL each), and the combined organic extracts are dried (Na2SO^, filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a yellow/brown oily solid. This crude product is triturated with EtOAc to give the title compound as a white solid. Step 2. S-Amino-l-pyrimidin^-yl-lH-pyrazole^-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000086_0001
A l N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (3.0 mL) is added to a suspension of ethyl 3-amino-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (500 mg, 2.14 mmol) in 6.0 mL of EtOH. The reaction mixture is heated to 50 °C for 16 h. After cooling to RT, water is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (3 x 20 mL). The aqueous layer is cooled to 0 °C and acidified to pH=2 with cone. HCl. The precipitated solid is collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as an off-white solid.
Step 3. N-(Adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-3 -amino- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxamide
Figure imgf000086_0002
To a mixture of 3-amino-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (50 mg,
0.24 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.08 mL, 0.48 mmol), 1- adamantan-1-ylmethan-amine (40 mg, 0.24 mmol), and BOP (128 mg, 0.29 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 18 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is filtered. The solid is washed well with water and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as an off- white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.22 (IH, s), 8.75 (2H, s), 8.07 (IH, s), 7.33 (IH, s), 5.85 (2H, s), 2.90 (2H, d, J 5.2), 1.91 (3H, s), 1.61 (6H, m), 1.46 (6H, s). MS (M+l) = 353.23; RT = 1.31 min. *IC50.
G. N-(ADAMANTAN- 1 -YLMETHYL)-3 -CHLORO- 1 -PYRIMIDIN-2-YL- 1 H-PYRAZOLE-4-
CARBOXAMiDE (COMPOUND 7) Step 1. Ethyl 3-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate and ethyl 5-chloro-l- pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate
Figure imgf000086_0003
A solution of sodium nitrite (1.0 g, 15.1 mmol) in 5.0 rnL of water is added dropwise to a solution of ethyl 3-amino-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (2.7 g, 11.6 mmol) in 18 mL of cone. HCl at -5 °C with stirring. After 1 h at 0 °C, the reaction mixture is added dropwise to a suspension of copper (I) chloride (1.8 g, 18.6 mmol) in 18 mL of CHCI3 at RT. After 1 h at RT, water (40 mL) and CHCl3 (40 mL) are added, and the layers are separated. The organic layer is washed once more with water (40 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a greenish/yellow solid. TLC analysis (70% EtOAc/CH2Cl2) of this crude solid reveals 2 products, which are separated by column chromatography (10% EtOAc/CH2Cl2) to afford ethyl 3 -chloro-1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- IH- pyrazole-4-carboxylate (Rf ~ 0.7) as a white solid. The minor, more polar compound ethyl 5- chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate, Rf~ 0.5) is also isolated as a white solid.
Step 2. 3-Chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000087_0001
A l N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (5.0 mL) is added to a suspension of ethyl 3-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (850 mg, 3.36 mmol) in 10.0 mL of EtOH. The reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 1 h. Most of the EtOH is removed in vacuo, and the aqueous solution is diluted with water, extracted with EtOAc (3 x), cooled to 0 °C, and acidified to pH=2-3 with cone. HCl. The precipitated solid is collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid. Step 3. N-(Adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-3 -chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrazole-4-carboxamide
Figure imgf000087_0002
To a mixture of 3-chloro-l -pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (50 mg, 0.22 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.08 mL, 0.44 mmol), 1- adamantan-1-ylmethan-amine (36 mg, 0.22 mmol), and BOP (115 mg, 0.26 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL). The CH2Cl2 layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography (gradient from 30% EtOAc/hexane to 60% EtOAc/hexane) to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.31 (IH, s), 8.91 (2H, d, J 4.8), 8.18 (IH, bs), 7.56 (IH, t, J4.8), 2.92 (2H, d, J 5.6), 1.92 (3H, s), 1.60 (6H, m), 1.47 (6H5 s). MS (M+l) = 372.18; Rτ = 1.35 min. *IC50.
H. N-(ADAMANTAN- 1 -YLMETHYL)-5-CHLORO- 1 -PYRIMIDIN-2-YL- 1 H-PYRAZOLE-4- CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 8)
Step 1. 5-Chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000088_0001
A 1 N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (2.0 mL) is added to a suspension of ethyl S-chloro-l-pyrimidin^-yl-lH-pyrazole^-carboxylate (250 mg, 1.11 mmol) in 5.0 mL of EtOH. The reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 1 h. Water is added, and the solution is washed with EtOAc. The aqueous layer is cooled to 0 °C and acidified to pH=2-3 with cone. HCl. The precipitated solid is collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid.
Step 2. N-(Adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-5 -chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrazole-4-carboxamide
Figure imgf000088_0002
To a mixture of 5-chloro-l -pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (50 mg, 0.22 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.08 mL, 0.44 mmol), 1- adamantan-1-ylmethan-amine (36 mg, 0.22 mmol), and BOP (115 mg, 0.26 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 18 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (5 mL). The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a reddish/brown oil. Purification by silica gel column chromatography (gradient from 90% EtOAc/hexane to EtOAc) affords the title compound as a light reddish/brown solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.89 (2H, d, J4.8), 8.28 (IH, s), 7.41 (IH, t, J4.8), 6.47 (IH, bs), 3.18 (2H, d, J 6), 2.01 (3H, s), 1.69 (6H, m), 1.58 (6H, s). MS (M+l) = 372.19; Rτ = 1.31 min. *IC50. I. 3-CHLORO-N-{4-METHYL-2-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]PENTYL}-l-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL- lH-PYRAZOLE-4-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 9)
Figure imgf000089_0001
To a mixture of 3-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (50 mg, 0.22 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.08 mL, 0.44 mmol), 4-methyl- 2-[4-(trifluoro-methyl)phenyl]pentan-l -amine (54 mg, 0.22 mmol), and BOP (115 mg, 0.26 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL). The CH2Cl2 layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography (gradient from 20% EtOAc/Hex to 60% EtOAc/Hex) to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.14 (IH, s), 8.89 (2H, d, J4.8), 8.33 (IH, bs), 7.64 (2H, d, J 8), 7.55 (IH, t, J4.8), 7.46 (2H, d, J7.6), 3.44 (IH, m), 3.33 (IH, m), 3.07 (IH, m), 1.57 (IH, m), 1.51 (IH, m), 1.26 (IH, m), 0.81 (6H, d, J 6.4). MS (M+l) = 452.14; Rx = 1.36 min. *IC50.
J. 3 -CHLORO- 1 -P YRIMIDIN-2- YL-N-( { 1 - [4-
(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]CYCLOHEXYL)METHYL)-IH-PYRAZOLE^-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 10)
Figure imgf000089_0002
To a mixture of 3-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (50 mg, 0.22 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.08 mL, 0.44 mmol), l-{l-[4- (trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]cyclohexyl)methanamine (57 mg, 0.22 mmol), and BOP (115 mg, 0.26 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is filtered. The solid is washed well with water and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.09 (IH, s), 8.78 (2H, d, J 4.8), 7.65 (2H, d, J 8.4), 7.55 (2H, d, J 8.4), 7.31 (IH, t, J 4.8), 6.27 (IH, bs), 3.63 (2H, d, J 6), 2.17 (2H, m), 1.77 (2H, m), 1.66 (2H, m), 1.42 (4H, m). MS (M+l) = 464.14; Rτ = 1.37 min.
*ic50.
K. 3-CHLORO-N-[( 1 -P YRIDIN-3 -YLCYCLOHEXYL)METHYL]-1 -PYRIMIDIN-2-YL- 1 H- PYRAZOLE-4-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 1 1)
Figure imgf000090_0001
To a mixture of 3-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (75 mg, 0.33 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.11 mL, 0.66 mmol), 1-(1- pyridin-3-ylcyclohexyl)-methanamine (63 mg, 0.33 mmol), and BOP (177 mg, 0.40 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (5 mL). The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by preparative chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.17 (IH, s), 8.90 (2H, d, J4.8), 8.58 (IH, s), 8.37 (IH, d, J3.6), 8.05 (IH, s), 7.76 (IH, d, J8.4), 7.56 (IH, t, J4.8), 7.31 (IH, m), 2.16 (2H, m), 1.60 (4H, m), 1.43 (IH, m), 1.21 (5H, m). MS (M+l) = 397.16; RT = 1.07 min. *IC50.
L. 3 -CHLORO-N- { [ 1 -(6-METHYLPYRIDIN-3 -YL)CYCLOHEXYL]METHYL} - 1 -PYRIMIDIN-2-YL- 1H-PYRAZOLE-4-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 12)
Figure imgf000090_0002
To a mixture of 3-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (75 mg, 0.33 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.11 mL, 0.66 mmol), l-[l-(6- methylpyridin-3-yl)-cyclohexyl]methanamine (67 mg, 0.33 mmol), and BOP (177 mg, 0.40 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (5 mL). The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by preparative chromatography (2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.18 (IH, s), 8.90 (2H, d, J4), 8.43 (IH, s), 8.03 (IH, s), 7.64 (IH, d, J8), 7.56 (IH, s), 7.18 (IH, d, J 7.6), 2.41 (3H, s), 2.13 (2H, m), 1.56 (5H, m), 1.22 (5H, m). MS (M+l) = 411.18; R1 = 1.08 min. *IC50.
M. 3-CHLORO-N-(4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3-YLPENTYL)-l-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL-lH-PYRAZOLE-4- CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 13)
Figure imgf000091_0001
To a mixture of 3-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (75 mg, 0.33 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially DIEA (0.11 mL, 0.66 mmol), 4-methyl- 2-pyridin-3-yl-pentan-l -amine (59 mg, 0.33 mmol), and BOP (177 mg, 0.40 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at RT for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (5 mL). The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by preparative chromatography (2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.13 (IH, s), 8.89 (2H, d, J 4.8), 8.39 (3H, m), 7.67 (IH, d, J 7.6), 7.55 (IH, t, J 4.4), 7.32 (IH, m), 3.43 (IH, m), 3.32 (IH, m), 2.99 (IH, bs), 1.58 (IH, m), 1.50 (IH, m), 1.25 (IH, m), 0.81 (6H, d, J6). MS (M+l) = 385.09; Rτ = 1.25 min.
N. 1 -IMIDAZO[ 1 ,2-A]PYRAZIN-8-YL-3 -TRIFLUOROMETHYL- IH-P YRAZOLE-4-C ARBOXYLIC ACID (I -P YRIDIN-3 -YL-CYCLOHEXYLMETHYL)-AMIDE (COMPOUND 14)
Step 1. 8-Chloro-imidazol[l,2-a]pyrazine
Figure imgf000091_0002
HBr (48% in H2O) is added to a solution of 2-amino-3-chloropyrazine (1.2 g, 9.26 mmol) and BrCH2CH(OEt)2 (1.6 mL, 10 mmol) in MeOH and H2O (5 mL and 10 mL) at RT. The mixture is stirred for 24 h at RT and then heated to 40 °C for 48 h. The pH is adjusted to 7 with sat. Na2Cθ3. The mixture is extracted with CH2Cl2. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous Na2SO^ The product is purified by silica gel column chromatography (4%MeOH in CH2Cl2) to give the title compound as an off white solid. Step 2. l-Imidazo[l,2-a]pyrazin-8-yl-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (1- pyridin-3-yl-cyclohexylmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000092_0001
Cs2CO3 is added to a solution of 8-chloro-imidazol[l,2-a]pyrazine (23 mg, 0.15 mmol) and 3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexymethyl)-amide (40 mg, 0.11 mmol) in NMP. The mixture is heated in a microwave reactor at 160 °C for 3 h. The mixture is poured into H2O. The crude product is filtered out, dissolved in 10% MeOH in CH2Cl2, and dried over anhydrous Na2SO^ The crude material is purified by PTLC (eluted with 4%MeOH in DCM) to afford the title compound. 1H NMR (CD3OD): 9.6 (s, IH), 8.6 (m, 2H), 8.39-8.28 (m, IH), 8.24 (s, IH), 7.97-7.84 (m, 2H), 7.80-
7.75 (m, 2H), 3.52 (s, 2H), 2.34-2.31 (m, 2H), 1.79-1.28 (m, 8H). MS (M+l) = 470.11; Rτ =
1.09 min. *IC50.
O. 1 -IMIDAZO[ 1 ,2-A]PYRAZIN-8-YL-3 -TRIFLUOROMETHYL- 1 H-PYRAZOLE^-CARBOXYLIC ACID (I -P YRIDIN-3- YL-C YCLOHEXYLMETHYL)- AMIDE (COMPOUND 15) Step 1. l-Pyrimidin-2-yl-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazol-4-carbonyl azide
Figure imgf000092_0002
ClCOOMe (0.19 mL, 2.4 mmol) is added dropwise to a solution of acid (545 mg, 2.1 mmol) in acetone at -10 °C. The mixture is stirred for 1 h. A solution Of NaN3 in H2O is added to the mixture and warmed to RT and stirred for 2 h. The solvent is removed to dryness. H2O is added and the solid is filtered out and washed with H2O, and then dried to give crude product, which is used without purification in the next step.
Step 2. l-Pyrimidin-2-yl-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazol-4-ylamine
Figure imgf000092_0003
A solution of l-pyrimidin-2-yl-3-trifluoromethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carbonyl azide (564 mg, 1.99 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) is heated to 100 °C for Ih. Cone. HCl is added and heated to 110 °C for 3 h. The mixture is cooled to RT. TEA (1.2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (10 mL) is added to the mixture. The organic phase is washed with brine and dried. The crude material is purified by PTLC (eluted with 2% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to afford the title compound.
Step 3. 2-Adamantan- 1 -yl-N-( 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-3 -trifluoromethyl- 1 H-pyrazol-4-yl)- acetamide
Figure imgf000093_0001
BOP (35 mg, 0.08 mmol) is added to a solution of l-pyrimidin-2-yl-3- trifluoromethyl- lH-pyrazol-4-ylamine (15 mg, 0.065 mmol), HOBt (5 mg), 1- adamantaneacetic acid (16 mg, 0.08 mmol) and DIEA (17 μL, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) at
RT. The mixture is stirred for 6 h. H2O is added to the mixture and is extracted with EtOAc
(3x10 mL). The organic phase is dried. The crude material is purified by PTLC using
4%MeOH in CH2Cl2 to afford the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 9.38 (s, IH), 8.6-81 (m, 2H), 7.30 (m, IH), 2.16 (s, 2H), 2.01-1.97 (m, 3H), 1.80-1.50 (m, 12H). MS (M+l) = 406.11;
RT = 1.4 min. *IC50.
P. 5-BENZYL-I5S-DIMETHYL-IH-PYRAZOLE^-CARBOXYLIC ACID (ADAMANTAN-I-
YLMETHYL)-AMIDE (COMPOUND 16)
Step 1. 2-Acetyl-3-oxo-4-phenyl-butyric acid methyl ester
Figure imgf000093_0002
NaOH (IO N, 4.4 mL, 44 mmol) in H2O is added to a solution Of MeCOCH2COOMe
(5 g, 43.1 mmol) in THF at RT. PhCH2COCl is added dropwise to the mixture and the mixture is stirred for 14 h. The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (2 x 30 mL). The organic phase is dried. The product is purified by silica gel column chromatography using 3-5% EtOAc in hexane to afford the title compound.
Step 2. 5-Benzyl-l,3-dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid methyl ester and 3-Benzyl-l,5- dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid methyl ester
Figure imgf000094_0001
MeNHNH2 (0.42 mL. 7.9 mmol) is added to a solution of 2-acetyl-3-oxo-4-phenyl- butyric acid methyl ester (1.84 g, 7.85 mmol) in EtOH (15 mL) at RT. The mixture is stirred for 14 h at RT. The solvent is removed and crude material is purified by column chromatography using 10-25% EtOAc in hexane to afford 5-benzyl-l,3-dimethyl-lH- pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid methyl ester (less polar) and 3 -benzyl- 1,5 -dimethyl- lH-pyrazole- 4-carboxylic acid methyl ester (more polar).
Step 3. 5-Benzyl-l,3-dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000094_0002
NaOH (IO N, 7 mL) is added to a solution of 5-benzyl- 1,3 -dimethyl- lH-pyrazole-4- carboxylic acid methyl ester (680 mg, 2.78 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) at RT. The mixture is heated to 50 °C for 4 h. The solvent is removed to dryness. H2O is added and pH is adjusted to 5 using aq. HCl. The solid is filtered and dried to give the title compound.
Step 4. 5-Benzyl- 1,3 -dimethyl- lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (adamantan-l-ylmethyl)-amide
Figure imgf000094_0003
BOP (44 mg, O.lmmol) is added to a solution of 5 -benzyl- 1,3 -dimethyl- IH pyrazole-
4-carboxylic acid (20 mg, 0.087mmol), admantan-1-yl-methylamine (15 mg, 0.09 mmol), HOBt (5 mg) and DIEA (17 μL, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) at rt. The mixture is stirred for 14 h. H2O is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (3 x 10 mL). The organic phase is dried. The title compound is obtained by PTLC using 20% EtOAc in hexane. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.29-7.21 (m, 3H), 7.12-7.11 (m, 2H), 5.39 (m, IH), 4.33 (s, 2H), 3.65 (s, 3H), 3.07 (m, 2H), 2.46 (s, 3H), 1.94 (m, 3H), 1.70-1.56 (m, 12H). MS (M+l) = 378.22; Rx = 1.67 min.
*ic50. Q. N-(ADAMANTAN-I-YLMETHYL)-I-BENZYL-IH-PYRAZOLE-S-CARBOXAMIDE AND N-
(ADAMANTAN-I-YLMETHYL)-I-BENZYL-IH-PYRAZOLE-S-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUNDS 17
AND 18)
Step 1. N-(l-adamantylmethyl)-lH-pyrazole-3-carboxamide
Figure imgf000095_0001
To a solution of lH-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (594 mg , 5.3 mmol) in 20 mL ACN is added 2.3 mL of DIEA (13.25 mmol), followed by 1.28 g of adamantylmethylamine hydrochloride salt (6.36 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred for 5 min at RT. 2.81 g of BOP (6.36 mmol) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred for 30 min at RT. The mixture is diluted with EtOAc and water. The organic layer is separated, and the aqueous layer is back extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is triturated with DCM and air-dried to give the title compound.
Step 2. N-(adamantan-l-ylmethyl)-l-benzyl-lΗ-pyrazole-5-carboxamide and N-(adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)- 1 -benzyl- 1 H-pyrazole-3 -carboxamide
Figure imgf000095_0002
A mixture of N-(l-adamantylmethyl)-lH-pyrazole-3-carboxamide (152 mg, 0.586 mmol), benzyl bromide (0.14 mL, 1.17 mmol) and cesium carbonate (382 mg, 1.17 mmol) in DMSO (4 mL) is heated at 100 °C for 2 h. After being cooled to RT, the mixture is diluted with EtOAc and water. The organic layer is separated, and the aqueous layer is back extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is purified with PTLC (20% EtOAc in hexanes) to give the title compounds. Ν-(adamantan-l -ylmethyl)- 1 -benzyl- lΗ-pyrazole-3- carboxamide: MS (M+ 1) = 350.26; Rτ = 1.4 min. 1H-NMR (δ, ppm, CDCl3 as internal standard): 7.51 (d, J= 1.8 Hz, IH), 7.38-7.21 (m, 5H), 6.51 (d, J= 2.1 Hz, IH), 5.94 (m, br, IH), 5.77 (s, 2H), 3.05 (d, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H), 1.96 (m, 3H), 1.72-1.57 (m, 6H), 1.44 (m, 6H). N-(adamantan-l-ylmethyl)-l-benzyl-lH-pyrazole-5-carboxamide: MS (M+ 1) = 350.26; RT = 1.39 min. 1H-NMR (δ, ppm, CDCl3 as internal standard): 7.40-7.31 (m, 4H), 7.22-7.19 (m, 2H), 6.96 (m, br, IH), 6.82 (d, J= 2.7 Hz, IH), 5.32 (s, 2H), 3.11 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H), 1.99 (m, 3H), 1.73-1.56 (m, 12H). * IC50 (for N-(adamantan-l-ylmethyl)-l -benzyl- lH-pyrazole-5- carboxamide).
R. l-METHYL-3-PHENYL-N-[(l-PYRIDIN-3-YLCYCLOHEXYL)METHYL]-lH-PYRAZOLE-5-
CARBOXAMiDE (COMPOUND 19)
Step 1. 2-Methyl-5-phenyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000096_0001
To a solution of 2-methyl-5-phenyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (2.3 g, 10 mmol) in MeOH (30 mL) is added 1 N NaOH (12 mL) in one portion at RT. The mixture is stirred at RT for 1 h. Most of the MeOH is removed with a rotary evaporator, and the remaining aqueous solution is diluted with water (12 mL) and neutralized with 1 N HCl to pΗ= 5. The precipitate is collected by filtration, washed with water and dried to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl): 7.26 - 7.82 (m, 6H), 4.26 (s, 3H); LC/MS (M+l) = 203.29; R1 = 1.54 min.
Step 2. 1 -Methyl-3 -phenyl-N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 H-pyrazole-5 - carboxamide
Figure imgf000096_0002
A solution of DMC in DCM (1.2 mL, 0.1 M, 1.2 eq.) is added to a solution of 2- methyl-5-phenyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (20 mg, 0.1 mmol, 1.0 equ.), (1 -pyridin-3 -yl- cyclohexyl)-methylamine (19 mg, 0.1 mmol, 1.0 eq.) and TEA (33 μL, 0.24 mmol, 2. 4 eq.) in DCM (1.0 mL) at RT. After standing overnight at RT, the reaction mixture is purified by PTLC (EtOAc/Ηexanes/TEA 50/50/1) to give the title compound. LC/MS (M+l) = 375.16; RT = 1.38 min. *IC50. S . 1 -METHYL-3 -PHENYL-N- { [ 1 -(METHYLP YRIDIΝ-3 -YL)CYCLOHEXYL]METHYL } - 1 H- PYRAZOLE-5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 20)
Figure imgf000097_0001
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example IR, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+ 1) = 389.18; Rτ = 1.37 min. *IC50.
T. 1 -METHYL-3 -PHENYL-N- { [ 1 -(4-CHLOROPHENYL)CYCLOHEXYL]METHYL) - 1 H-PYRAZOLE- 5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 21)
Figure imgf000097_0002
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example IR, with readily apparent modification of starting material, and with PTLC using EtOAc/TEA 100: 1. LC/MS (M+l) = 408.13; Rr = 1.75 min. *IC50..
EXAMPLE 2
Synthesis of Additional Representative 5-Membered Heterocyclic Amides and Related
Compounds This Example illustrates the synthesis of additional representative 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds provided herein, as well as certain intermediates useful in the preparation of such compounds.
A. 2-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL-4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXYLIC ACID ETHYL ESTER
Figure imgf000097_0003
Method A:
Step 1. 2-Pyrimidinecarbothioamide A mixture of 2-cyanopyrimidine (15 g) and thioacetamide (20 g) in 100 mL of 10% concentrated HCl in DMF is heated with stirring at 90 °C for three hours and cooled. The solid is collected by filtration, washed with water and dried to afford the title compound.
Step 2. 2-Pyrimidin-2-yl-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester A mixture of 2-pyrimidinecarbothioamide (2 g) and 2-chloro-4,4,4-trifluoro-3-oxo- butyric acid ethyl ester (3.2 g) in 10 mL of DMF is heated at 110 °C with stirring overnight. The mixture is concentrated under vacuum, and purified on silica gel column to afford the title compound.
Method B: Step 1. 2-Amino-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000098_0001
A mixture of thiourea (8.7 g) and 2-chloro-4,4,4-trifluoro-3-oxo-butyric acid ethyl ester (25 g) in 200 mL of EtOH is heated with stirring for 3 h. The solvent is evaporated and water is added to the residue, and basified with NaHCC>3. The solid is collected with filtration, washed with water and hexane, and dried to afford the title compound.
Step 2. 2-Bromo-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
Figure imgf000098_0002
To a solution of 2-amino-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (10 g) in 48% HBr (75 mL) at 0 °C is added a solution of sodium nitrite (4.25 g) in water (50 mL) dropwise over 1 h. The mixture is stirred at the same temperature for an additional 30 min, then a solution of CuBr (6 g) in 48% HBr (50 mL) is added dropwise over 30 min. The reaction mixture is stirred for additional 30 min at 0 °C and for 2 h at RT. The mixture is extracted three times with methylene chloride. The combined organic extracts are dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by chromatography (silica gel, hexane to 3% EtOAc/Hexane) to yield the title compound.
Step 3. 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
A mixture of 2-bromo-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (303 mg), 2-tributylstannanyl-pyrimidine (553 mg) and dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)-palladium
(II) (70 mg) in dioxane (5 mL) is heated at 110 °C in a sealed tube overnight. After the reaction mixture is cooled, a potassium fluoride solution and EtOAc are added and the mixture is stirred for 1 h and filtered. The organic layer is separated and aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc once. The combined extracts are concentrated and the residue is purified by chromatography (silica gel, 4: 1 Hexane and EtOAc) to give the title compound.
B. 2-PYRlMIDIN-2-YL-4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-TfflAZOLE-5-CARBOXYLIC ACID
Figure imgf000099_0001
A mixture of 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.6 g) and sodium hydroxide (1.2 g) in MeOH (10 mL) and water (3 mL) is heated at 50 °C with stirring for 30 min, cooled and evaporated. The residue is acidified with citric acid solution and extracted with EtOAc six times. The combined extracts are washed once with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title compound as a solid.
C. 4-ETHYL-2-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL-THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXYLIC ACID
Figure imgf000099_0002
This compound is prepared essentially as described for 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4- trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid, with readily apparent starting material modification.
D. 4-METHYL-2-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL-THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXYLIC ACID
Figure imgf000099_0003
This compound is prepared essentially as described for 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4- trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid, with readily apparent starting material modification. E. 4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-2-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL-THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXYLIC ACID [2-(4-CHLORO- PHENYL)-4-METHYL-PENTYL] -AMIDE (COMPOUND 22)
Figure imgf000100_0001
Step 1. 2-(4-Chloro-phenyl)-4-methyl-pentylamine
Figure imgf000100_0002
To a mixture of (4-chloro-phenyl)-acetonitrile (20 g) and l-iodo-3 -methyl-butane (24.3 g) in THF (100 mL) and DMSO (100 mL) is added NaH (60% in mineral oil, 5.28 g) portionwise at 0 °C over one hour. The mixture is allowed to warm to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is poured into water and extracted twice with EtOAc. The extract is concentrated and the residue is purified by silica gel chromatography to give 1- pyridin-3 -yl-cyclohexanecarbonitrile .
To a solution of the above product (15 g) in 40 mL of 7.0 N NH3 in MeOH is added carefully slurry of Raney Nickel (30 g). The mixture is hydrogenated at 50 psi overnight. The mixture is filtered through Celite and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound. Step 2. 4-trifluoromethyl-2-pyrimidin-2-yl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid [2-(4-chloro-phenyl)~
4-methyl-pentyl] -amide
A mixture of 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (15 mg),
2-(4-chloro-phenyl)-4-methyl-pentylamine hydrochloride (14 mg), BOP (25 mg) and TEA
(20 mg) in ACN (1 mL) is stirred at RT overnight. EtOAc and water added to the mixture and the organic layer is separated, washed twice with water and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by PTLC (1:1 EtOAc/Hexane) to give the title compound. MS (M+ 1) =
469.11; Rx = 1.36 min. *IC50. F. N-[2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-2-PIPERIDIN- 1 -YLETHYL]-2-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL-4-
(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)-I 3S-THIAZOLE-S-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 23)
Figure imgf000101_0001
A mixture of 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (60 mg), 2-(4-chloro-phenyl)-2-piperidin-l-yl-ethylamine (60 mg), BOP (100 mg) and TEA (40 mg) in ACN (1 mL) is stirred at RT overnight. EtOAc and water added to the mixture and the organic layer is separated, washed twice with water and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by PTLC (10% MeOH in methylene chloride) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 496.09; Rx = 1.14 min. *IC50.
G. N- { [ 1 -(4-METHYLPIPERAZIN- 1 -YL)CYCLOHEPTYL]METHYL} -2-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL-4- (TRIFLUOROMETHYL)-I5S-THIAZOLE-S-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 24)
Figure imgf000101_0002
Step 1. 4-(l-cyano-cycloheptyl)-piperazine-l-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester
To a solution of cycloheptanone (1 g) and trimethylsilyl cyanide (0.85 g) in ether (1 mL) is added zinc iodide (2 mg) at 0 °C and the solution is stirred at the same temperature for
15 min. To the solution is added dropwise a solution of t-Boc-piperazine (1.6 g) in 10 mL of
MeOH at RT. The resultant reaction mixture is heated at reflux for 3 h and stirred at RT overnight. The mixture is then concentrated to dryness to give the title compound.
Step 2. [l-(4-methyl-piperazin-l-yl)-cycloheptyl]-methylamine To solution of LAH in THF (IM, 27 mL) is added a solution of 4-(l-cyano- cycloheptyl)-piperazine-l-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (1 g) in THF (1 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred at RT overnight. Water is added to quench excess LAH and the mixture is treated with Na2SO4 and filtered through Celite. EtOAc is used to wash the Celite pad thoroughly and the filtrate is concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound. Step 3. N- { [ 1 -(4-methylpiperazin- 1 -yl)cycloheptyl]methyl} -2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4- (trifluoromethyl)- 1 ,3 -thiazole-5 -carboxamide
A mixture of 2-pyrimidin-2-yl-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (15 mg), 2-(4-chloro-phenyl)-2-piperidin-l-yl-ethylamine (15 mg), BOP (25 mg) and TEA (10 mg) in ACN (1 mL) is stirred at RT overnight. EtOAc and water are added to the mixture and the organic layer is separated, washed twice with water and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by PTLC (10% MeOH in methylene chloride) to give the title compound. MS (M+ 1) = 483.21; RT = 1.15 min. *IC50.
H. 2-BROMO-4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXYLIC ACID (1 -PYRIDIN-3-YL- CYCLOHEXYLMETHYL)-AMIDE (COMPOUND 25)
Figure imgf000102_0001
Step 1. (l-Pyridin-3-yl-cyclohexyl)-methylamine
Figure imgf000102_0002
To a mixture of pyridin-3-yl-acetonitrile (14.65 g) and 1,5-dibromo-pentane (28.52 g) in THF (450 mL) and DMSO (450 mL) is added NaH (60% in mineral oil, 10.42 g) portionwise at 0 °C over 1 h. The mixture is allowed to warm to RT and stirred overnight.
The reaction mixture is poured into water and extracted twice with EtOAc. The extract is concentrated and the residue is purified by silica gel chromatography to give l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexanecarbonitrile. To a solution of the above product (18.5 g) in 140 mL of 7.0 N NH3 in MeOH is added carefully slurry of Raney Nickel (16 g). The mixture is hydrogenated at 50 psi overnight. The mixture is filtered through Celite and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound.
Step 2. 2-fert-butoxycarbonylamino-4-methyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester A mixture of 2-amino-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (9.69 g), di-fe7Y-butyl dicarbonate (10.6 g) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (500 mg) in THF (100 mL) is heated at reflux overnight. The mixture is concentrated in vacuo and purified by chromatography (silica gel, 5-10% EtOAc in Hexane) to yield the title compound. Step 3. 2-fer^Butoxycarbonylamino-4-methyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid
A mixture of 2-?er/-butoxycarbonylamino-4-methyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (4.3 g) and sodium hydroxide (10 N, 2.5 mL) in MeOH (80 mL) is heated at 50 °C overnight. The mixture is cooled, concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water and acidified to pH 4-5 with 2 N HCl. The solid is collected by filtration and dried to give the title compound.
Step 4. 2-fer^Butoxycarbonylamino-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (1-pyridin-
3 -yl-cyclohexylmethyl)-amide
A mixture of 2-/ert-butoxycarbonylamino-4-methyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (1.56 g), (l-pyridin-3-yl-cyclohexyl)-methylamine (1 g), BOP (2.66 g) and TEA (0.84 mL) in DMF (30 mL) is stirred at RT for 30 min and poured into ice water. The solid is collected by filtration and dried to give the title compound. MS (M+ 1) = 485.21; Rτ = 1.18 min.
Step 5. 2-Amino-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide
A mixture of 2-fer/-butoxycarbonylamino-4-methyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (1- pyridin-3-yl-cyclohexylmethyl)-amide (2.45 g) and TFA (10 mL) in methylene chloride (10 mL) is stirred at RT for 2 h and concentrated in vacuo. Water is added to the residue and the mixture is basified with Na2CO3 solution and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is washed with brine, dried and concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound.
Step 6. 2-Bromo-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide
To a stirred mixture of CuBr2 (746 mg) in 40 mL of ACN is added tert-hu\y\ nitrite
(0.63 mL), followed by 2-amino-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide (1.36 g). The reaction mixture is stirred at RT for 30 min and
EtOAc and water are added. The organic layer is separated, washed with diluted ammonium hydroxide solution and brine, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 5% MeOH in methylene chloride) to give the title compound. MS
(M+l) = 449.77; Rτ = 1.38 min.
I. 2-( 1 , 1 -DlOXIDO- 1 ,2-THIAZINAN-2-YL)-N-[( 1 -PYRIDIN-3 -YLCYCLOHEXYL)METHYL] -A- (TRIFLUOROMETHYL)-l,3-THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 26)
Figure imgf000103_0001
A mixture of 2-bromo-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide (44.8 mg) 1,4-butanesultam (17.6 mg), palladium acetate (2.2 mg), xantphos (8.7 mg) and cesium carbonate (49 mg) in toluene (1 mL) is heated at 100 °C for 2 h. The mixture is cooled, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is concentrated in vacuo and the residue is purified by PTLC (silica gel, 5% MeOH in methylene chloride) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 503.16; Rτ = 1.14 min. *IC50.
J. 2-((R)-S-DIMETHYLAMINO-PYRROLIDIN-I-YL)^-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-THIAZOLE-S-
CARBOXYLic ACID (1 -P YRIDIN-3 -YL-CYCLOHEXYLMETHYL)-AMIDE (COMPOUND 27)
Figure imgf000104_0001
A mixture of 2-bromo-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide (44.8 mg), dimethyl-(R)-pyrrolidin-3-yl-amine (12.6 mg), and potassium carbonate (15.2 mg) in ACN (1 mL) is heated at 80 °C for 1 h. The mixture is cooled, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is concentrated in vacuo and the residue is purified by PTLC (silica gel, 5% MeOH in methylene chloride) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 482.24; Rτ = 1.03 min. *IC50.
K. 2-(6-METHOXY-P YRIDIN-3 -YL)-4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-THIAZOLE-5 -C ARBOXYLIC ACID (1 -p YRIDIN-3 -YL-CYCLOHEXYLMETHYL)-AMIDE (COMPOUND 28)
—
Figure imgf000104_0002
A mixture of 2-bromo-4-trifluoromethyl-thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide (44.8 mg), 2-methoxy-5-pyridineboronic acid (30.6 mg), Pd(PPh3)4 (5.8 mg) and Na2CO3 (42.4 mg) in dioxane (2 mL) and water (0.8 mL) is heated at 110 °C in an argon purged sealed vial for 2 h. The mixture is poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is concentrated and the residue is purified by PTLC (silica gel, 5% MeOH in methylene chloride) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 477.19; Rx = 1.19 min. *IC50. L. N- { [ 1 -(4-CHLOROPHENYL)C YCLOHEXYL]METHYL } -4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3 -YL- 1,3- THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 29)
Figure imgf000105_0001
A solution of DMC in DCM (1.2 mL, 0.1 M, 1.2 eq.) is added to a solution of 2-(3- pyridyl)-4-methylthiazole-5-carboxylic acid (21 mg, 0.1 mmol, 1.0 eq.), [l-(4- chlorophenyl)cyclohexyl]-methylamine (22 mg, 0.1 mmol, 1.0 eq.) and TEA (33 μL, 0.24 mmol, 2. 4 eq.) in DCM (1.0 mL) at RT. After standing overnight at RT, the reaction mixture is purified by PTLC (EtOAc/MeOH/TEA 100/5/3) to give the title compound. LC/MS (M+ 1) = 426.25; R1 = 1.36 min. *IC50.
M. N- {4-METHYL-2-[4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]PENTYL} -4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3 -YL- 1,3-TΉIAZOLE-5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 30)
Figure imgf000105_0002
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+l) = 448.26; Rτ = 1.36 min. *IC50.
N. N-[2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-4-METHYLPENTYL}-4-METHYL-2-PYRIDrN-3-YL-l,3- THIAZOLE-5 -CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 31)
Figure imgf000105_0003
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+l) = 414.23; Rτ = 1.36 min. *IC50. O. N-( { 1 -[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL] CYCLOHEXYL }METHYL)-4-METHYL-2 -PYRIDIN- 3-YL-l-,3-THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 32)
Figure imgf000106_0001
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+ 1) = 460.26; Rτ = 1.37 min. *IC50.
P. N-[4-METHYL-2-(4-METHYLPHENYL)PENTYL}-4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3-YL-l,3-THIAZOLE-
5 -CARBOXAMiDE (COMPOUND 33)
Figure imgf000106_0002
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+ 1) = 394.28; Rx = 1.3 min. *IC50.
Q. N- { [ 1 -(4-FLUOROPHENYL)CYCLOHEXYL]METHYL) } -4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3 -YL- 1,3- THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 34)
Figure imgf000106_0003
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+ 1) = 410.21 ; Rτ = 1.28 min. *IC50. R. N-[2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)PENTYL}-4-METHYL-2 -PYRIDIN-S-YL-I5S-THIAZOLE-S-
CARBOXAMiDE (COMPOUND 35)
Figure imgf000107_0001
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L5 with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+ 1) = 400.17; Rτ = 1.29 min. *IC50.
S . N- { [ 1 -(4-METHOXYPHENYL)CYCLOHEXYL]METHYLI -4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3 -YL- 1,3- THIAZOLE-5-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 36)
Figure imgf000107_0002
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+ 1) = 422.27; Rx = 1.29 min. *IC50.
T. N-{[4-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)TETRAHYDRO-2H-PYRAN-4-YL]METHYL}-4-METHYL-2- PYRIDIN-S-YL-I5S-THIAZOLE-S-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 37)
Figure imgf000107_0003
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+ 1) = 428.17; Rτ = 1.2 min. *IC50. U. N- { [ 1 -(4-METHYLPHENYL)C YCLOHEXYL]METHYL} -4-METHYL-2-P YRIDIN-3 -YL- 1,3- THIAZOLE-5 -CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 38)
Figure imgf000108_0001
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+l) = 406.24; Rx = 1.33 min. *IC50.
V. N- { [ 1 -(4-CHLORO-3 -FLUOROPHENYL)CYCLOHEXYL]METHYL) -4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3 - YL-l-^-THIAZOLE-S-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 39)
Figure imgf000108_0002
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+l) = 444.15; R1 = 1.33 min. *IC50.
W. N- { [ 1 -(6-METHYLPYRIDIN-3 -YL)CYCLOHEXYL]METHYL) -4-METHYL-2-PYRIDIN-3-YL- 1 -
,3-THIAZOLE-S-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 40)
Figure imgf000108_0003
This compound is prepared essentially as described in Example 2L, with readily apparent modification of starting material. LC/MS: (M+l) = 407.21; R1- = 1.03 min. *IC50. X. N-(ADAMANTAN-I-YLMETHYL)-S-METHYLTHIOPHENE^-CARBOXAMIDE (COMPOUND 41)
Figure imgf000109_0001
To a 2 mL reaction vial is added adamantylmethylamine (0.15 mL, 0.2M in toluene), S-methylthiophene^-carboxylic acid (0.15 mL, 0.2M in dimethylacetamide), 2-chloro-l,3- dimethylimidazolinium chloride (0.20 mL, 0.2M in ACN), and TEA (0.20 mL, 0.2M in toluene). The mixture is placed on a shaker and heated to 50 °C for 16 h. The mixture is cooled to RT and diluted with IM aqueous sodium hydroxide (0.5 mL). The resulting mixture is extracted with 50% EtOAc-hexane (3 x 0.5 mL) and purified over benzenesulfonic acid ion exchange resin (eluted with 50% EtOAc-hexane) to afford the title compound.
LC/MS: (M+l) = 290.19; Rx = 1.33 min.
EXAMPLE 3
Synthesis of Additional Representative 5-Membered Heterocyclic Amides and Related
Compounds Additional 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds are synthesized by DMC (2 eq) coupling of carboxylic acid (1.2 eq) and amine (1.0 eq):
Figure imgf000109_0002
The amine (0.2 M in toluene; 0.10 mL) and acid (0.2 M in DMA; 0.12 mL) are added to a vial along with DMC 3 (0.2 M in ACN, freshly prepared; 0.2 mL) and TEA (0.3 M in toluene; 0.10 mL) are added to a vial and incubated at RT for 16 h. The reaction mixture is then extracted with 1 N NaOH (0.5 mL) and EtOAc (0.5 mL). The upper organic layer is removed and concentrated to dryness. The residue is purified via solid phase extraction chromatography eluting with 25%MeOH/EtOAc (4.0 mL) to afford the title compound.
Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein. Compounds listed in Table I are prepared using such methods. In the column of Table I labeled "IC50," a "*" indicates that the
IC50 determined as described in Example 4A is 2 micromolar or less (i e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to 80 μM of (2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate is 2 micromolar or less). Mass spectroscopy data is provided as (M+ 1) in the column headed "MS." The retention time, in minutes, is provided in the column headed R1. It will be apparent that, within Table I and elsewhere herein, an amine designated
Figure imgf000110_0002
is the same as
Figure imgf000110_0001
Table I Representative 5-Membered Heterocyclic Amides and Related Compounds
Figure imgf000110_0003
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000113_0001
Figure imgf000114_0001
Figure imgf000115_0001
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
Figure imgf000119_0001
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000127_0001
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000129_0001
Figure imgf000130_0001
Figure imgf000131_0001
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000133_0001
Figure imgf000134_0001
Figure imgf000135_0001
Figure imgf000136_0001
Figure imgf000137_0001
Figure imgf000138_0001
Figure imgf000139_0001
Figure imgf000140_0001
Figure imgf000141_0001
Figure imgf000142_0001
Figure imgf000143_0001
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000145_0001
Figure imgf000146_0001
Figure imgf000147_0001
Figure imgf000148_0001
Figure imgf000149_0001
Figure imgf000150_0001
Figure imgf000151_0001
Figure imgf000152_0001
Figure imgf000153_0001
Figure imgf000154_0001
Figure imgf000155_0001
Figure imgf000156_0001
Figure imgf000157_0001
Figure imgf000158_0001
Figure imgf000159_0001
Figure imgf000160_0001
Figure imgf000161_0001
Figure imgf000162_0001
Figure imgf000163_0001
Figure imgf000164_0001
Figure imgf000165_0001
Figure imgf000166_0001
EXAMPLE 4 P2X7 Calcium Mobilization Assay
This Example illustrates representative calcium mobilization assays for use in evaluating test compounds for agonist and antagonist activity. A. HIGH THROUGHPUT ASSAY OF P2X7 RECEPTORS
SH-SY5Y cells, ATCC Number CRL-2266, (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, VA) are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO2 and at 37 °C. One day prior to the experiment, cells are plated at a density of 100,000 cells/well in a 96 well black/clear TC plate (Corning® Costar®, Sigma-Aldrich Co., St. Louis, MO). At the beginning of the experiment, the culture medium is removed and cells are incubated with 50 μL of 2.3 μM Fluo-4 AM dye (Invitrogen Corp.) in the assay solution (5 mM KCl, 9.6 mM NaH2PO4H2O, 25 mM HEPES, 280 mM sucrose, 5 mM glucose, and 0.5 mM CaCl2; pH is adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH) for an hour at 37 °C. After one hour dye incubation, wells are rinsed once with 50 μL assay solution, and are then incubated for an hour at room temperature with 100 μL assay solution containing the test compound. The final concentration of test compound generally ranges from 1 to 2500 nM; for positive control cells, no test compound is added. After the one hour incubation, plates are transferred to a FLIPRTETRA instrument (Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA) for calcium mobilization analysis.
For determination of antagonist activity, 50 μL of P2X7 agonist (2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl- benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate (BzATP; Sigma-Aldrich) in the assay solution is transferred using the FLIPR into the plate, such that the final agonist concentration is 80 μM (about EC50). In negative control cells, 50 μL of assay solution without agonist is added at this stage. The peak fluorescence signal over a 2 minute period is then measured.
The data is analyzed as follows. First, the average maximum relative fluorescent unit (RFU) response from the negative control wells (no agonist) is subtracted from the maximum response detected for each of the other experimental wells. Second, average maximum RFU response is calculated for the positive control wells (agonist wells). Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation:
Percent Inhibition = 100 - 100 x (Peak Signal in Test Cells / Peak Signal in Control Cells)
The % inhibition data is plotted as a function of test compound concentration and test compound IC50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition^ 100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression. The IC50 is e (-mtercept/slope)
Alternatively, a sigmoidal fit can be used, such as that achieved using KALEIDAGRAPH software (Synergy Software, Reading, PA), which determines the best fit of the data to the equation: y = m1*(l/(l+(m2/m0)m3)) where y is the percent inhibition, m0 is the concentration of the agonist, mi is the maximum RFU, m2 corresponds to the test compound IC50 (the concentration required to provide a 50% decrease, relative to the response observed in the presence of agonist and without antagonist) and m3 is the Hill coefficient. For antagonists of the P2X7 receptor, the calculated IC50 is preferably below 20 micromolar, more preferably below 10 micromolar, even more preferably below 5 micromolar and most preferably below 1 micromolar.
Similar assays are performed in the absence of added agonist for the determination of agonist activity of the test compounds. Within such assays, the ability of a test compound to act as an agonist of P2X7 receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response elicited by the test compound as a function of compound concentration. P2X7 receptor antagonists that exhibit no detectable agonist activity elicit no detectable fluorescence response at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
B . ELECTROPHYSIOLOGY ASSAY FOR P2X7 RECEPTORS SH-SY5Y cells are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10%
FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO2 and at 37 °C, and are split onto 12 mm round Poly-D-Lysine (PDL) coated coverslips (BD Biosciences, San Jose, CA) in a 35 mm dish with a density of 130K cells/dish a day prior to the experiment. Whole cell voltage clamp recordings are made with the Axopatch-200B amplifier (Axon Instruments, Foster City, CA). The recording electrodes are pulled from borosilicate pipettes (World Precision Instruments, Sarasota, FL) on a horizontal puller (Sutter Instrument Model P-87) and have resistances ranging from 2 to 3 MΩ when backfilled with internal solution. All voltage protocols are generated using pClamp 8 (Axon Instruments) software. Data are digitized at 1 or 5 kHz and recorded onto a PC for further analysis. Data are analyzed using Clampfit (Axon Instruments), Excel (Microsoft, Redmond, WA), and Origin software (MicroCal, LLC; Northampton, MA). All whole-cell recordings are conducted at room temperature. Internal solution contains (in mM): 100 KF, 40 KCl, 5 NaCl, 10 EGTA and 10 HEPES (pH = 7.4 adjusted with KOH). The external solution contains 70 mM NaCl, 0.3 mM CaCl2, 5 mM KCl, 20 mM HEPES, 10 mM glucose, and 134 mM sucrose (pH = 7.4 adjusted with NaOH). All chemicals are from Sigma, unless otherwise stated.
P2X7 receptor is activated by 200 μM of P2X7 agonist, BzATP. At a holding potential of -80 mV, the activated inward current is recorded in the presence and absence of the test compound. Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation: % Inhibition = 100 - 100 x (Current Amplitude in Compound / Current Amplitude in Control). To determine a test compound's IC50 for P2X7 receptor electrophysiologically, several concentrations of the compound are tested and their inhibitions on P2X7 currents are calculated as above. This dose-response curve is best fitted using Origin software (Microcal, MA) with the following equation: Percent Inhibition = 100/(1 + (IC50/C)N) where C is the concentration of the antagonist, N is the Hill coefficient, and IC50 represents the compound IC50 value against P2X7 receptors.
EXAMPLE 5
Carrageenan-Induced Mechanical Hyperalgesia (Paw Pressure) Assay for Determining Pain Relief
This Example illustrates a representative method for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a test compound.
Adult male Sprague Dawley rats (200-300g; obtained from Harlan Sprague Dawley, Inc., Indianapolis, IN) are housed under a 12 h light/dark cycle with access to food and water ad libitum. For the assay, all animals are habituated once, baselined twice and tested once, with each procedure being conducted on a separate day. Prior to each day's procedure, animals are allowed to acclimate for at least 1 hour in the testing room before the start of the procedure. For habituation, each animal is gently restrained with each hindpaw consecutively extended in front of the animal as is necessary for testing. This procedure is performed by alternating hindpaws and repeated three times for each hindpaw. Animals are then subjected to the first baseline, second baseline and testing on consecutive days. For each baseline, the animal is restrained as in the habituation session and the paw tested using the paw pressure testing apparatus (Digital Randall Selitto, IITC Inc., Woodland Hills, CA). Animals are baselined and tested in groups of ten, each animal being tested once on the left and right hindpaws, followed by the next consecutive animal. This procedure is repeated three times for a total of three measurements on each hindpaw. If any individual read is drastically different (varies by more than about 100 g) from the other two on a given hindpaw, the hindpaw is retested a 4th time, and the average of the three most consistent scores is used. On test day, all animals are injected with 0.1 mL intraplantar 0.5% -1.5% carrageenan (dissolved in saline) 3 hours prior to testing. Test compounds or vehicle may be administered by various routes at various timepoints prior to testing, but for any particular assay, the routes and timepoints are the same for animals in each treatment group administered test compound (a different dosage of test compound may be administered to each such group) and those in the treatment group administered vehicle control. If a compound is orally administered, the animals are food-deprived the evening before testing. As with the baseline, each hindpaw is tested three times and the results recorded for analysis.
Hypersensitivity of nociception values are calculated for each treatment group as the mean of the left foot gram force scores on test day (left foot only or LFO score). Statistical significance between treatment groups is determined by running an ANOVA on LFO scores followed with a least significant difference (LSD) post hoc test. A p<0.05 is considered to be a statistically significant difference.
Compounds are said to relieve pain in this model if they result in a statistically significant reduction in hypersensitivity of nociception values compared to vehicle controls, determined as described above, when administered (0.01-50 mg/kg, orally, parenterally or topically) immediately prior to testing as a single bolus, or for several days: once or twice or three times daily prior to testing.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000171_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
Figure imgf000171_0002
represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring; W is -C(=O)NR4-, -NR4C(=O)- or -NR4-NR4-C(=O)-;
X is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) hydroxy and -COOH; (ii) C1-C8alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (iii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and (iv) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to
7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii), (iii) and (iv) is substituted with from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-Qalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is C4-C12cycloalkyl that is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, — COOH, C1-Csalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C,-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl; R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-Ceaminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
such that R2 is not an alkoxy or haloalkoxy group if
Figure imgf000172_0001
represents pyrazole or imidazole; Each R4 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon- carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, which alkylene is optionally substituted with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl; and M is:
(i) hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C3-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0- C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1- C6alkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7- membered heterocycle; such that: RA is not unsubstituted benzyl; and
if
Figure imgf000172_0002
represents pyrazole or imidazole and L is absent, then:
(a) A is not O; and
(b) if A is absent, then M is not unsubstituted or substituted C1-C6alkoxy.
2. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 1, wherein: Y is:
Figure imgf000173_0001
Ri represents from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2- C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl.
3. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 1 or claim 2, wherein X is not absent.
4. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-3,
wherein
Figure imgf000173_0002
is pyrazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole or thiophene.
5. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 4, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000173_0003
wherein Z1, Z2 and Z3 are independently N, NH, CH, S or O; such that no more than one of
Z1, Z2 and Z3 is chosen from O and S.
6. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000173_0004
7. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 6, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000174_0001
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C,-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
8. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000174_0002
9. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 8, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000174_0003
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
10. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 5, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000175_0001
or wherein R3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C,- C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- Qalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
11. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 4, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000175_0002
wherein:
Z4 and Z5 are independently CH, N, NH, O or S; and
Z6 is CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z4, Z5 and Z6 is chosen from O and S.
12. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 11, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000175_0003
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
13. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 7, 9, 10, 12 and 13, wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1- C4haloalkyl.
14. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein RA is phenylC0-C2alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl- T- or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, (mono- or di-C1- C6alkylamino)C0-C4alkyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, — COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4haloalkyl;
such that if
Figure imgf000176_0001
represents pyrazole or imidazole, then T is not O; and RA is not unsubstituted benzyl.
15. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 14, wherein RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C,-C6haloalkyl, C1-Qhydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; wherein the 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl or chosen from
Figure imgf000176_0002
16. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein RA is C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-Cόalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminocarbonyl, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1- C4haloalkyl;
such that if
Figure imgf000177_0001
represents pyrazole or imidazole, then RA is not optionally substituted C1-
C6alkoxy.
17. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 16, wherein RA is C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0- C4alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, and 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl.
18. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 17, wherein RA is C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyloxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
19. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 18, wherein RA is: (i) C3-C6alkyl that is substituted with amino, hydroxy or -COOH; or (ii) mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C2alkyl that is substituted with from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, amino, -COOH and C1- C4alky lsulfonylamino .
20. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein RA is a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000178_0001
wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene;
Figure imgf000178_0002
represents a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally fused to phenyl or to a 6-membered heteroaryl; and R7 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; (ii) C1-C6alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylaminoC0-C4alkyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, CpC6alkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino; and (iii) substituents that are taken together to form a bridge of the Formula -(CH2)q-P-(CH2)r- , wherein q and r are independently O or 1 and P is CH2, O, NH or S.
21. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 20, wherein RA is a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000178_0003
wherein:
G is CH or N; s and t are independently O, 1, 2, 3 or 4, such that the sum of s and t ranges from 2 to 5; and
Rs is:
(i) hydrogen, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylaminoC0-C4alkyl, or 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1- Qalkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and C1-Cealkylsulfonylamino.
22. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 20, wherein RA is
Figure imgf000179_0001
wherein:
R9 is: (i) C1-Cέalkyl that is substituted with -COOH; or (ii) a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl that is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 oxo; and Rio represents one substituent chosen from:
(i) -COOH;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl that is substituted with -COOH;
(iii) mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C2alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl and C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino; each of which is substituted with from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo and -COOH; and
(iv) C1-C6haloalkylsulfonylamino.
23. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-22, wherein R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C1- C6alkyl and C1-C6haloalkyl.
24. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-23, wherein X is methylene or ethylene, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from C1-C4alkyl, (C3-Cgcycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and substituents that are taken together, with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring.
25. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-24, wherein Y is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino.
26. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-25, wherein -W-X-Y is:
Figure imgf000180_0001
wherein:
Ri represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-
C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and Each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound to form a C3-Cgcycloalkyl.
27. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 27, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000180_0002
Figure imgf000181_0001
Figure imgf000182_0001
wherein m is 0 or 1.
28. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000182_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
Z1, Z2 and Z3 are independently N, NH, CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z1, Z2 and
Z3 is chosen from O and S; W is -C(O)NR4-, -NR4C(O)- or -NR4-NR4-C(=O>;
V is C1-C6alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (ii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring; and (iii) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is C3-C16cycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-Cealkylsulfonyl, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (Q-Qcycloalky^Co^alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-
C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; Each R4 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of V to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; Either:
(i) each R5 is independently hydrogen, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl or (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, such that at least one R5 is not hydrogen; or
(ii) both R5 moieties are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3-C7cycloalkyl; and RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon- carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, which alkylene is optionally substituted with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, (C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl; and
M is a (5- to 10-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; such that RA is not pyrrole.
29. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 28, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000183_0001
30. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 29, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000184_0001
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- Cήhydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
31. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 28, wherein the compound has the formula:
32. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 31, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000184_0003
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C!-C6alkyl)amino, C1-Cealkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
33. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 28, wherein the compound has the formula:
R5
Figure imgf000185_0001
or wherein R3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C,-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
34. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 30, 32 or 33, wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4 aloalkyl.
35. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 28-34, wherein RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0- C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, (mono- or di-C1- C6alkylamino)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- ( C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0- C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, d-C6alkyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
36. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 35, wherein RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle, wherein the 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl or chosen from:
Figure imgf000186_0001
37. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 28-36, wherein R2 represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C1- C6alkyl and C1-C6haloalkyl.
38. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 28-37, wherein V is methylene or ethylene, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and substituents that are taken together, with the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
39. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 38, wherein V is methylene.
40. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 28-39, wherein Y is C3-C16cycloalkyl, 6- to 10-membered aryl or 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- Qhydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)ammo.
41. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 28-39, wherein Y is phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; each of which is optionally fused to a 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or a 5- to 7-membered heterocycle; and each of which phenyl, heteroaryl, carbocycle and heterocycle is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, Q-C6alkenyl, C2- Qalkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino.
42. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 28-41, wherein -W-V-C(R5)(R5)-Y is:
Figure imgf000187_0001
wherein:
Figure imgf000187_0002
is phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl;
Ri represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; or two substituents represented by R1 are taken together, with any intervening ring atoms, to form a fused 4- to 7-membered carbocycle or a fused 4- to 7-membered heterocycle;
Each R5 is independently hydrogen, d-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R5 are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl; and
Each R5a is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R5a are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl.
43. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 42,
Figure imgf000187_0003
wherein is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazolyl or pyrimidinyl.
44. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 43, wherein -W-V- C(R5)(Rs)-Y is:
Figure imgf000187_0004
wherein J and K are independently CH or N.
45. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 44, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000188_0001
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-Cehaloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
46. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000188_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein: W is -C(=O)NR4- or -NR4C(=O) -;
X is C2-C6alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy and -COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (iii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and (iv) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to
7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii), (iii) and (iv) is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is C3-C16cycloalkyl, phenyl or 6- to 10-membered heterocycle, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2- C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-Qhydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
R2 represents from O to 2 ring substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; Each R4 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; RA comprises a ring and has the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon- carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, which alkylene is optionally substituted with oxo,-COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl; and M is:
(i) hydroxy, cyano, amino, halogen, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0- C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1- C6alkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(a) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and - COOH; and
(b) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1- C4haloalkyl; such that RA is not: (i) pyridazine that is substituted with C1-C6alkoxy, (ii) substituted or unsubstituted benzyl, (iii) unsubstituted phenyl or (iv) an O-linked moiety.
47. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 46, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000190_0001
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
48. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 47, wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, - COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C,-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- Qaminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino.
49. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 48, wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl.
50. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 46-49, wherein RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
51. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 50, wherein the (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl is thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl or pyridazinyl.
52. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 46-51 , wherein:
Y is phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and
R4 is hydrogen or C1-C4alkyl.
53. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 52, wherein -X-Y is:
Figure imgf000191_0001
wherein: J and K are independently CH or N;
R1 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and
Each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, or taken together with another R5 attached to the same carbon atom, and with the carbon atom to which the R5 moieties are bound, to form a C3- C8cycloalkyl or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
54. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 46, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000192_0001
wherein:
RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl; J and K are independently CH or N;
Ri represents from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino;
Each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl; and Each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, Q-Qcycloalkyl or phenyl; or two R5 are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl.
55. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 54, wherein at least one R5 is not hydrogen.
56. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 55, wherein both R5 are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3- Cgcycloalkyl.
57. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000193_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
W is -C(=O)NR4-, -NR4C(=O)- or -NR4-NR4-C(=O)-;
X is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) hydroxy and -COOH;
Cii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-Cgcycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-Ceaminoalkyl, Q-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (iii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and (iv) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to
7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii), (iii) and (iv) is substituted with from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is C3-C16cycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (Q- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; R3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether or (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; Each R4 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and RA is phenylC0-C4alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
58. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 57, wherein R3 is hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl.
59. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 57 or claim 58, wherein -W-X-Y is:
Figure imgf000194_0001
wherein:
J and K are independently CH or N; Ri represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and
Each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl. 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or phenyl; or taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl .
60. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 59, wherein -W-X- Y is:
Figure imgf000195_0001
61. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 60, wherein at least one R5 is not hydrogen.
62. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 61, wherein both R5 are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3- Cgcycloalkyl.
63. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 57-62, wherein RA is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C,-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C,-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
64. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 57-62, wherein RA is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
65. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 57, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000196_0001
wherein: m is O or 1; Y is:
Figure imgf000196_0002
J and K are independently CH or N;
Ri represents from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- Qalkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino;
R3 is hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl;
Each R5 is independently (i) hydrogen; (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or phenyl; or (iii) taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C1-C6cycloalkyl or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii) or (iii) is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chose from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, C1- C6alkyl C1- C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and
RA is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7- membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1- C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl and C1-Qhaloalkyl.
66. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000197_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
Figure imgf000197_0002
represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring; such that is not furan, lH-pyrrole or isoxazole;
W is -CX=O)NR4-, -NR4C(=O) - or -NR4-NR4-C(=O) -;
V is absent or C1-C5alkylene that is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from: (i) -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; (ii) substituents that are taken together, with any intervening carbon atoms, to form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and (iii) substituents that are taken together with R4 and any intervening atoms to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; each R4 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-Cscycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of V to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; each R5 is independently (i) -COOH; (ii) (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2- C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or phenylC0-C2alkyl; or (iii) taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (ii) or (iii) is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chose from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, C1- C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyi)amino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; such that at least one R5 is not methyl; and R11 and R12 are
(i) independently chosen from C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl and (C3-
C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl; or (ii) taken together, with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, to form a 4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl; each of which (i) and (ii) is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, Q-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7- membered heterocycle; and RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon- carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, which alkylene is optionally substituted with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl; and M is:
(i) hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0- C4alkyl, (4- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1- C6alkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C,-C6haloalkoxy, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1 -C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7- membered heterocycle;
such that (i) RA is not methyl, acetyl or trifluoroethanone; (ii) if
Figure imgf000199_0001
is thiophene,
then R11 and R12 not taken together to form morpholinyl; (iii) if
Figure imgf000199_0002
is pyrazole, then
RA is not benzyl or 4-methylbenzyl; and (iv) if
Figure imgf000199_0003
is thiazole, then RA is not unsubstituted phenyl, unsubstituted pyridin-2-yl, unsubstituted thiophen-2-yl, unsubstituted thiophen-3-yl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 3,4- dimethoxyphenyl or 4-(p-tolyloxymethyl).
67. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 66, wherein V is absent or methylene.
68. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 66 or claim 67,
wherein
Figure imgf000199_0004
represents pyrazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole or thiophene.
69. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 66-68, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000199_0005
wherein Z1, Z2 and Z3 are independently N, NH, CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z1, Z2 and Z3 is chosen from O and S.
70. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 69, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000199_0006
71. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 70, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000200_0001
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
72. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 71, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000200_0002
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
73. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 69, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000201_0001
wherein R3 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, — COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1- C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
74. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 71-73, wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl.
75. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim any one of claims 66-68, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000201_0002
wherein:
Z4 and Z5 are independently CH, N, NH, O or S; and
Z6 is CH, S or O; such that no more than one of Z4, Z5 and Z6 is chosen from O and S.
76. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 66-75, wherein RA is phenylC0-C2alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl- T- or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C,-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, (mono- or di-C1-
C6alkylamino)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, — COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
77. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 75, wherein RA is (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; wherein the 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl or chosen from
Figure imgf000202_0001
78. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 66-75, wherein RA is C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylammo, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and — COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2- C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminocarbonyl, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylaminosulfonyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1- C4haloalkyl; such that i .f
Figure imgf000203_0001
represents pyrazole or imidazole, then RA is not optionally substituted C1- C6alkoxy.
79. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 78, wherein RA is C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0- C4alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from amino, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, and 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl.
80. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 66-75, wherein RA is a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000203_0002
wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene;
Figure imgf000203_0003
represents a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally fused to phenyl or to a 6-membered heteroaryl; and R7 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; (ii) C1-C6alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylaminoC0-C4alkyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino; and (iii) substituents that are taken together to form a bridge of the Formula -(CH2)q-P-(CH2)r- , wherein q and r are independently O or 1 and P is CH2, O, NH or S.
81. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 80, wherein RA is a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000203_0004
wherein:
G is CH or N; s and t are independently 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, such that the sum of s and t ranges from 2 to 5; and R8 is:
(i) hydrogen, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylaminoC0-C4alkyl, or 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino.
82. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 81 , wherein RA is
Figure imgf000204_0002
wherein:
R9 is: (i) C1-C6alkyl that is substituted with -COOH; or (ii) a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl that is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 oxo; and R10 represents one substituent chosen from:
(i) -COOH;
(ii) C,-C6alkyl that is substituted with -COOH;
(iii) mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C2alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl and C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino; each of which is substituted with from O to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo and — COOH; and
(iv) C1-C6haloalkylsulfonylamino.
83. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 66-82, wherein R2 represents from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, C1- C6alkyl and C1-C6haloalkyl.
84. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 66-83, wherein
Figure imgf000204_0001
Figure imgf000205_0001
wherein:
R] i and Ri2 are taken together, with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-Qhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; and
Each R5 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C3-C7cycloalkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or phenyl; or taken together with another R5 moiety and the carbon atom or carbon atoms to which they are bound to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl .
85. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 84, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000205_0002
Figure imgf000205_0003
; wherein m is 0 or 1.
86. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 85, wherein the R5 moieties are taken together, with the carbon atom to which they are bound, to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl.
87. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000206_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein: W is -C(O)NR4-, -NR4C(=O)- or -NR4-NR4-C(=O)-;
Figure imgf000206_0002
is a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from O to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
R3 is halogen, cyano, C3-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; Each R4 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and
RA is phenylC0-C4alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl-T- or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-Cealkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2- C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
88. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 87, wherein R3 is halogen, cyano, C1-C4haloalkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl.
89. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 87 or claim 88, wherein Y is piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from C1-C6alkyl.
90. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 87-89, wherein:
Figure imgf000207_0001
is a group of the formula x is 0, 1 or 2; and M is CH2, NH, S or O.
91. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 90, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000207_0002
wherein R13 is hydrogen or C1-C4alkyl.
92. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 87-81, wherein RA is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aIkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2- C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
93. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 87-92, wherein RA is 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, and halogen; and (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C2- C4alkenyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
94. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000208_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein:
Figure imgf000208_0002
represents a 5-membered heteroaryl ring; such that is not furan or isoxazole;
Y is 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or (Ii-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
R2 represents from O to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1- C6alkanoyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-Cealkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-
C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and (C1- C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
L is absent or C1-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon- carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, which alkylene is optionally substituted with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone; A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, A- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl; and M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0- C4alkyl, (4- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C1- C6alkanoylamino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-C1-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle;
such that (i) RA is not methyl; and (ii) if
Figure imgf000209_0001
is thiazole, then RA is not unsubstituted phenyl or unsubstituted thiophen-3-yl.
95. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any claim 94,
wherein
Figure imgf000209_0002
is pyrazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole or thiophene.
96. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 65, wherein the compound satisfies the formula:
Figure imgf000210_0001
wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C,- C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C1-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
97. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 96, wherein each R3 is independently hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl.
98. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 94-97, wherein RA is phenylC0-C2alkyl, (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl- T- or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl-T-, wherein T is S or O; each of which is substituted with from O to 4 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and -COOH; and
(ii) C1- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-
C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkenylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, (mono- or di-C1- C6alkylamino)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di- (C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, amino, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
99. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 94-98, wherein Y is:
Figure imgf000211_0001
J and K are independently CH or N; and
R1 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino.
100. A compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof, wherein the compound is any one of compounds 1-321.
101. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-100, wherein the compound exhibits no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor agonism.
102. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-101, wherein the compound is capable of exhibiting an IC50 value of 20 micromolar or less in an assay for P2X7 receptor antagonism.
103. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102 in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
104. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 103, wherein the composition is formulated as an injectible fluid, an aerosol, a cream, an oral liquid, a tablet, a gel, a pill, a capsule, a syrup, or a transdermal patch.
105. A method for modulating the activity of a P2X7 receptor in vitro, the method comprising contacting P2X7 receptor with at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102, under conditions and in an amount sufficient to detectably alter P2X7 receptor activity.
106. A method for modulating the activity of a P2X7 receptor in a patient, comprising contacting cells expressing P2X7 receptor with at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102, in an amount sufficient to detectably alter P2X7 receptor activity in vitro, and thereby altering the activity of the P2X7 receptor in the patient.
107. A method according to claim 106, wherein the patient is a human.
108. A method for treating a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102, and thereby alleviating the condition in the patient.
109. A method according to claim 108, wherein the condition is pain.
110. A method according to claim 109, wherein the pain is neuropathic pain.
111. A method according to claim 109, wherein the pain is arthritis-associated pain, a neuropathic pain syndrome, visceral pain, dental pain, headache, stump pain, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome, pain associated with nerve and root damage, causalgia, neuritis, neuronitis, neuralgia, surgery-related pain, musculoskeletal pain, central nervous system pain, spinal pain, Charcot's pains, ear pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, acute and chronic back pain, gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, complex regional pain syndrome, cancer-associated pain, pain associated with venom exposure, trauma-associated pain, pain associated with autoimmune diseases or immunodeficiency disorders, or pain that results from hot flashes, burns, sunburn, or exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli.
112. A method according to claim 108, wherein the condition is inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder.
113. A method according to claim 108, wherein the condition is osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, glaucoma, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, or interstitial fibrosis.
114. A method for inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102, and thereby inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in the patient.
115. A method for promoting weight loss in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist, and thereby promoting weight loss in the patient.
116. A method according to any one of claims 102-115, wherein the patient is a human.
117. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102, wherein the compound is radiolabeled.
118. A method for determining the presence or absence of P2X7 receptor in a sample, comprising the steps of:
(a) contacting a sample with a compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102, under conditions that permit modulation by the compound of P2X7 receptor activity; and
(b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound or salt or hydrate thereof modulating P2X7 receptor activity, and therefrom determining the presence or absence of P2X7 receptor in the sample.
119. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 103 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat pain.
120. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 103 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder, obesity or an immune system disorder.
121. The use of a compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-102 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation.
122. A use according to claim 121, wherein the condition is pain, inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, glaucoma, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, or interstitial fibrosis.
PCT/US2008/070613 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds WO2009012482A2 (en)

Priority Applications (23)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EA200971084A EA017250B1 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides, use thereof for modulation of p2xreceptor
CA2691507A CA2691507C (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
NZ582057A NZ582057A (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
UAA200913338A UA105758C2 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
DK08796352.6T DK2178865T3 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
US12/669,308 US20100292236A1 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-Membered Heterocyclic Amides And Related Compounds
KR1020157026989A KR20150118197A (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
MX2009014159A MX2009014159A (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds.
CN200880021346.2A CN101711245B (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
ES08796352.6T ES2551095T3 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
AU2008275891A AU2008275891B2 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
PL08796352T PL2178865T3 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
RS20150681A RS54303B1 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
JP2010517200A JP2010533736A (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
BRPI0813426-0A2A BRPI0813426A2 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 COMPOUND, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, METHODS FOR MODULATING THE ACTIVITY OF A P2X7 RECEIVER, TO TREAT A CONDITION, TO INHIBIT RETINAL GANGLONIC CELL DEATH, TO PROMOTE LOSS OF WEIGHT, AND TO DETERMINE THE PREPOSE TO PREPOSE OR PREPOSE PRESSURE PHARMACEUTICAL CONDITIONS, USE OF COMPOUND OR SALT OR HYDRATE THEREOF.
SI200831516T SI2178865T1 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
EP08796352.6A EP2178865B1 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
ZA2009/08447A ZA200908447B (en) 2007-07-19 2009-11-30 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
IL202499A IL202499A (en) 2007-07-19 2009-12-03 Pyrazole and thiazole p2x7 receptor modulators
HK10108934.0A HK1142330A1 (en) 2007-07-19 2010-09-20 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
PH12014501677A PH12014501677B1 (en) 2007-07-19 2014-07-23 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
US14/480,979 US9133204B2 (en) 2007-07-19 2014-09-09 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
HRP20151052TT HRP20151052T1 (en) 2007-07-19 2015-10-05 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US95062507P 2007-07-19 2007-07-19
US60/950,625 2007-07-19

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/669,308 A-371-Of-International US20100292236A1 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-Membered Heterocyclic Amides And Related Compounds
US14/480,979 Continuation US9133204B2 (en) 2007-07-19 2014-09-09 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009012482A2 true WO2009012482A2 (en) 2009-01-22
WO2009012482A3 WO2009012482A3 (en) 2009-04-30

Family

ID=40260407

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/070613 WO2009012482A2 (en) 2007-07-19 2008-07-21 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds

Country Status (29)

Country Link
US (2) US20100292236A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2178865B1 (en)
JP (2) JP2010533736A (en)
KR (2) KR20150118197A (en)
CN (2) CN104844578B (en)
AU (1) AU2008275891B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0813426A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2691507C (en)
CO (1) CO6251318A2 (en)
CY (1) CY1116809T1 (en)
DK (1) DK2178865T3 (en)
EA (1) EA017250B1 (en)
ES (1) ES2551095T3 (en)
HK (2) HK1142330A1 (en)
HR (1) HRP20151052T1 (en)
HU (1) HUE026446T2 (en)
IL (1) IL202499A (en)
MX (1) MX2009014159A (en)
MY (1) MY154668A (en)
NZ (1) NZ582057A (en)
PH (1) PH12014501677B1 (en)
PL (1) PL2178865T3 (en)
PT (1) PT2178865E (en)
RS (1) RS54303B1 (en)
SG (1) SG187396A1 (en)
SI (1) SI2178865T1 (en)
UA (1) UA105758C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2009012482A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200908447B (en)

Cited By (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012036193A1 (en) * 2010-09-15 2012-03-22 アステラス製薬株式会社 Therapeutic agent for fatty liver disease containing p2x7 receptor inhibitory substance as active ingredient
US8227462B2 (en) 2008-09-10 2012-07-24 Novartis Ag Pyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxamide derivatives
US8293753B2 (en) 2009-07-02 2012-10-23 Novartis Ag Substituted 2-carboxamide cycloamino ureas
WO2013010946A2 (en) 2011-07-15 2013-01-24 Basf Se Pesticidal methods using substituted 3-pyridyl thiazole compounds and derivatives for combating animal pests i
US8404684B2 (en) 2003-05-02 2013-03-26 Novartis Ag Inhibitors of phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase
US8410112B2 (en) 2008-11-10 2013-04-02 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
WO2013079566A3 (en) * 2011-11-30 2013-07-25 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Fungicidal n- bicycloalkyl and n-tricycloalkyl pyrazole - 4 - (thio) carboxamide derivatives
WO2013108227A1 (en) 2012-01-20 2013-07-25 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
JP2013534215A (en) * 2010-07-23 2013-09-02 ソルヴェイ（ソシエテ アノニム） Process for the preparation of esters of 1-substituted-3-fluoroalkyl-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acids
WO2013186089A2 (en) 2012-06-14 2013-12-19 Basf Se Pesticidal methods using substituted 3-pyridyl thiazole compounds and derivatives for combating animal pests
US8623869B2 (en) 2010-06-23 2014-01-07 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
WO2014053450A1 (en) 2012-10-02 2014-04-10 Bayer Cropscience Ag Heterocyclic compounds as pesticides
EP2725022A1 (en) * 2008-06-13 2014-04-30 Bayer CropScience AG New amides as pest control agents
US8765751B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2014-07-01 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
WO2014115078A1 (en) * 2013-01-22 2014-07-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
US8822469B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2014-09-02 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pyrrolo[2,3-B]pyrazines useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841450B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841449B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841308B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pyrazin-2-amines useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841337B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8846918B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8846686B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2014-09-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8846917B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8853217B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2014-10-07 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8871754B2 (en) 2012-11-19 2014-10-28 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions for the treatment of parasitic diseases
US8877759B2 (en) 2011-04-05 2014-11-04 Vertex Pharnaceuticals Incorporated Aminopyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US8912198B2 (en) 2012-10-16 2014-12-16 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8940771B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2015-01-27 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
US8962631B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-02-24 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8969356B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-03-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9035053B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2015-05-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Processes for making compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9062008B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-06-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9096584B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-08-04 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9096602B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2015-08-04 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrrolo[2,3-B]pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
WO2015150300A1 (en) 2014-04-02 2015-10-08 Bayer Cropscience Ag N-(1-(hetero)aryl-1h-pyrazol-4-yl)-(hetero)arylamide derivatives and use thereof as pesticides
US9221832B2 (en) 2011-07-22 2015-12-29 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US9309250B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2016-04-12 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US9334244B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2016-05-10 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9340546B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2016-05-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9388197B2 (en) 2013-01-22 2016-07-12 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US9556169B2 (en) 2012-11-19 2017-01-31 Novartis Ag Compounds and compositions for the treatment of parasitic diseases
US9556117B2 (en) 2012-12-18 2017-01-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Indole carboxamide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US9630956B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2017-04-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
WO2017076825A1 (en) 2015-11-02 2017-05-11 H. Lundbeck A/S Inhibitor of the p2x7 receptor
US9663519B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-05-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9670215B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2017-06-06 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9718774B2 (en) 2012-12-12 2017-08-01 Idorsia Pharmaceuticals Ltd Indole carboxamide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonist
US9732080B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2017-08-15 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Azaindole derivatives as CFTR modulators
US9791456B2 (en) 2012-10-04 2017-10-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for measuring ATR inhibition mediated increases in DNA damage
US10071979B2 (en) 2010-04-22 2018-09-11 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Process of producing cycloalkylcarboxamido-indole compounds
US10081621B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2018-09-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Solid forms of (R)-1(2,2-difluorobenzo[D][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)-N-(1-(2,3-dihydroxypropyl)-6-fluoro-2-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-1H-indol-5-yl)cyclopropanecarboxamide
US10160760B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2018-12-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10206877B2 (en) 2014-04-15 2019-02-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator mediated diseases
US10478430B2 (en) 2012-04-05 2019-11-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase and combination therapies thereof
US10813929B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2020-10-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Treating cancer with ATR inhibitors
US11179394B2 (en) 2014-06-17 2021-11-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of Chk1 and ATR inhibitors
US11464774B2 (en) 2015-09-30 2022-10-11 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of DNA damaging agents and ATR inhibitors
US11827627B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2023-11-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated N-(hydroxyalkyl (hetero)aryl) tetrahydrofuran carboxamides as modulators of sodium channels
US11834441B2 (en) 2019-12-06 2023-12-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted tetrahydrofurans as modulators of sodium channels
US12102607B2 (en) 2017-12-12 2024-10-01 Dompe' Farmaceutici S.P.A. C5aR inhibitors for use in the treatment of chemotherapy-induced iatrogenic pain

Families Citing this family (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101921268B (en) * 2010-08-27 2016-08-03 中山大学肿瘤防治中心 5-thiazole amide compound and biological applications
BR112013002484B1 (en) * 2010-09-21 2021-10-13 Eisai R&D Management Co. , Ltd. COMPOUND, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, AND, USES OF A COMPOUND
CN102603637A (en) * 2012-01-18 2012-07-25 中国药科大学 Pyrazol compound and purpose of pyrazol compound used as receptor tyrosine kinases (RTK) and phosphatidyl inositol 3-kinase (PI3K) dual inhibitors
EP2897953B8 (en) * 2012-09-19 2019-06-26 Cyclerion Therapeutics, Inc. Sgc stimulators
CA2954747A1 (en) * 2014-07-31 2016-02-04 Dow Agrosciences Lcc Process for the preparation of 3-(3-chloro-1h-pyrazol-1-yl)pyridine
CN106488909A (en) * 2014-07-31 2017-03-08 美国陶氏益农公司 The method for preparing 3 (3 chlorine 1H pyrazoles, 1 base) pyridine
CA2954631A1 (en) * 2014-07-31 2016-02-04 Dow Agrosciences Llc Process for the preparation of 3-(3-chloro-1h-pyrazol-1-yl)pyridine
DK3356345T3 (en) * 2015-09-30 2024-02-12 Max Planck Gesellschaft HETEROARYL DERIVATIVES AS SEPIAPTERIN REDUCTASE INHIBITORS
CN106187910A (en) * 2016-07-07 2016-12-07 浙江大学 Pyridazine class derivant and its production and use
CN112119063B (en) * 2018-05-18 2023-10-17 富士胶片株式会社 Method for producing 3-difluoromethylpyrazole compound, method for producing 3-difluoromethylpyrazole-4-carboxylic acid compound, and pyrazolidine compound

Family Cites Families (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA962269A (en) * 1971-05-05 1975-02-04 Robert E. Grahame (Jr.) Thiazoles, and their use as insecticides
US3852293A (en) * 1972-06-21 1974-12-03 Uniroyal Inc 4-phenyl-2-(3-pyridyl)-thiazole carboxamides
WO1997005131A1 (en) * 1995-08-02 1997-02-13 J. Uriach & Cia. S.A. New carboxamides with antifungal activity
US6323227B1 (en) * 1996-01-02 2001-11-27 Aventis Pharmaceuticals Products Inc. Substituted N-[(aminoiminomethyl or aminomethyl)phenyl]propyl amides
WO1998041519A1 (en) * 1997-03-18 1998-09-24 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Novel cannabinoid receptor agonists
SE9704544D0 (en) 1997-12-05 1997-12-05 Astra Pharma Prod Novel compounds
SE9704545D0 (en) * 1997-12-05 1997-12-05 Astra Pharma Prod Novel compounds
WO2000062778A1 (en) * 1999-04-15 2000-10-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Cyclic protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
US7125875B2 (en) * 1999-04-15 2006-10-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Cyclic protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
DE60023128T2 (en) * 1999-05-12 2006-07-06 Ortho-Mcneil Pharmaceutical, Inc. PYRAZOL CARBOXAMIDE FOR THE TREATMENT OF FATIBILITY AND OTHER DISORDERS
PE20011010A1 (en) * 1999-12-02 2001-10-18 Glaxo Group Ltd OXAZOLES AND THIAZOLES REPLACED AS AGONIST OF THE RECEPTOR ACTIVATED BY THE HUMAN PEROXISOMAS PROLIFERATOR
GB0011095D0 (en) * 2000-05-08 2000-06-28 Black James Foundation astrin and cholecystokinin receptor ligands (III)
US7223782B2 (en) * 2001-11-01 2007-05-29 Icagen, Inc. Pyrazole-amides and -sulfonamides
WO2003037330A1 (en) * 2001-11-02 2003-05-08 Pfizer Products Inc. Sulfonyl-and sulfonylheteroaryl-pyrazoles with a hydrazinyl or nitrogen oxide substituent at the 5-position for use as cyclooxygenase inhibitors
PA8557501A1 (en) * 2001-11-12 2003-06-30 Pfizer Prod Inc BENZAMIDA, HETEROARILAMIDA AND INVESTED AMIDAS
WO2004048334A1 (en) 2002-11-26 2004-06-10 Pfizer Products Inc. Phenyl substituted piperidine compounds for use as ppar activators
ATE466855T1 (en) * 2002-10-30 2010-05-15 Vertex Pharma COMPOSITIONS USABLE FOR INHIBITING ROCK AND OTHER KINASES
CN1732164A (en) * 2002-10-30 2006-02-08 沃泰克斯药物股份有限公司 Compositions useful as inhibitors of ROCK and other protein kinases
WO2004060870A1 (en) * 2003-01-02 2004-07-22 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Novel cb 1 receptour inverse agonists
US20040220170A1 (en) * 2003-05-01 2004-11-04 Atkinson Robert N. Pyrazole-amides and sulfonamides as sodium channel modulators
CA2524397A1 (en) * 2003-05-07 2004-11-18 Pfizer Products Inc. Cannabinoid receptor ligands and uses thereof
ES2281801T3 (en) * 2003-05-12 2007-10-01 Pfizer Products Inc. BENZAMIDE INHIBITORS OF THE P2X7 RECEIVER.
US7223780B2 (en) * 2003-05-19 2007-05-29 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Triazole-derivatives as blood clotting enzyme factor Xa inhibitors
EP1479679A1 (en) * 2003-05-19 2004-11-24 Aventis Pharma Deutschland GmbH Triazole-derivatives as factor Xa inhibitors
PT1641764E (en) * 2003-06-26 2011-10-27 Novartis Ag 5-membered heterocycle-based p38 kinase inhibitors
SE0302192D0 (en) * 2003-08-08 2003-08-08 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
KR20060121909A (en) * 2003-10-08 2006-11-29 버텍스 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Modulators of atp-binding cassette transporters containing cycloalkyl or pyranyl groups
US7517900B2 (en) * 2003-10-10 2009-04-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Pyrazole derivatives as cannabinoid receptor modulators
ES2328824T3 (en) 2003-11-14 2009-11-18 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated USEFUL TIAZOLS AND OXAZOLES AS MODULATORS OF CONNECTORS OF CASETE TYPE FROM UNION TO ATP.
WO2005061462A2 (en) 2003-12-19 2005-07-07 Neurogen Corporation Diaryl pyrazole derivatives and their use as neurokinin-3 receptor modulators
WO2005075435A1 (en) * 2004-01-30 2005-08-18 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Modulators of atp-binding cassette transporters
RU2006138036A (en) * 2004-03-30 2008-05-10 Чирон Корпорейшн (Us) SUBSTITUTES OF SUBSTITUTED THIOPHENE AS ANTI-CANCER AGENTS
EP1745019A1 (en) * 2004-05-06 2007-01-24 Pfizer Inc. Novel compounds of proline and morpholine derivatives
DE102004051277A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Merck Patent Gmbh Heterocyclic carbonyl compounds
WO2006089076A2 (en) * 2005-02-18 2006-08-24 Neurogen Corporation Thiazole amides, imidazole amides and related analogues
MX2008002014A (en) * 2005-08-15 2008-03-27 Hoffmann La Roche Piperidine and piperazine derivatives as p2x3 antagonists.
WO2007056046A1 (en) 2005-11-07 2007-05-18 Abbott Laboratories P2x7 receptor antagonists and methods of use
CA2628260A1 (en) 2005-11-09 2007-05-18 Abbott Laboratories 2-phenyl-2h-pyraz0le derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists and uses thereof
JP5498703B2 (en) 2006-01-23 2014-05-21 バーテックス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Thiophene-carboxamides useful as inhibitors of protein kinases
WO2007143597A2 (en) * 2006-06-05 2007-12-13 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
EP2044055A4 (en) 2006-07-21 2011-03-23 Takeda Pharmaceutical Amide compounds
MX2009003821A (en) * 2006-10-10 2009-05-25 Amgen Inc N-aryl pyrazole compounds for use against diabetes.
CN101679297B (en) 2006-12-08 2012-01-11 埃克塞利希斯股份有限公司 LXR and FXR modulators
CL2008000836A1 (en) 2007-03-26 2008-11-07 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Thiazolidine derivative compounds, orexin receptor antagonists; pharmaceutical composition that includes them; and its use in the treatment of emotional neurosis, severe depression, psychotic disorders, Alzheimer's, parkinson's, pain, among others.
DE602008005582D1 (en) 2007-05-10 2011-04-28 Glaxo Group Ltd PYRAZONE DERIVATIVES AS P2X7 MODULATORS

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
None
See also references of EP2178865A4

Cited By (89)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8404684B2 (en) 2003-05-02 2013-03-26 Novartis Ag Inhibitors of phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase
US9732080B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2017-08-15 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Azaindole derivatives as CFTR modulators
US8940771B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2015-01-27 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
EP2725022A1 (en) * 2008-06-13 2014-04-30 Bayer CropScience AG New amides as pest control agents
US9428487B2 (en) 2008-06-13 2016-08-30 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Heteroaromatic amides and thioamides as pesticides
US8227462B2 (en) 2008-09-10 2012-07-24 Novartis Ag Pyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxamide derivatives
US8476268B2 (en) 2008-09-10 2013-07-02 Novartis Ag Pyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxamide derivatives
US8710085B2 (en) 2008-09-10 2014-04-29 Novartis Ag Pyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxamide derivatives
US8410112B2 (en) 2008-11-10 2013-04-02 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10479784B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2019-11-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrazin-2-amines as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841308B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pyrazin-2-amines useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9365557B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2016-06-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrazin-2-amines as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9701674B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2017-07-11 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US10961232B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2021-03-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US8293753B2 (en) 2009-07-02 2012-10-23 Novartis Ag Substituted 2-carboxamide cycloamino ureas
US10081621B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2018-09-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Solid forms of (R)-1(2,2-difluorobenzo[D][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)-N-(1-(2,3-dihydroxypropyl)-6-fluoro-2-(1-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-2-yl)-1H-indol-5-yl)cyclopropanecarboxamide
US10071979B2 (en) 2010-04-22 2018-09-11 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Process of producing cycloalkylcarboxamido-indole compounds
US9630956B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2017-04-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9062008B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-06-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9334244B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2016-05-10 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8969356B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-03-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8962631B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-02-24 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9096584B2 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-08-04 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8623869B2 (en) 2010-06-23 2014-01-07 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
JP2013534215A (en) * 2010-07-23 2013-09-02 ソルヴェイ（ソシエテ アノニム） Process for the preparation of esters of 1-substituted-3-fluoroalkyl-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acids
WO2012036193A1 (en) * 2010-09-15 2012-03-22 アステラス製薬株式会社 Therapeutic agent for fatty liver disease containing p2x7 receptor inhibitory substance as active ingredient
US8877759B2 (en) 2011-04-05 2014-11-04 Vertex Pharnaceuticals Incorporated Aminopyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US9309250B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2016-04-12 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US9096602B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2015-08-04 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrrolo[2,3-B]pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US8822469B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2014-09-02 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pyrrolo[2,3-B]pyrazines useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
WO2013010946A2 (en) 2011-07-15 2013-01-24 Basf Se Pesticidal methods using substituted 3-pyridyl thiazole compounds and derivatives for combating animal pests i
US20140296064A1 (en) * 2011-07-15 2014-10-02 Basf Se Pesticidal methods using substituted 3-pyridyl thiazole compounds and derivatives for combating animal pests i
US9221832B2 (en) 2011-07-22 2015-12-29 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US10822331B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2020-11-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Processes for preparing ATR inhibitors
US8846686B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2014-09-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10208027B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2019-02-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Processes for preparing ATR inhibitors
US9862709B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2018-01-09 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Processes for making compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8765751B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2014-07-01 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10813929B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2020-10-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Treating cancer with ATR inhibitors
US8853217B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2014-10-07 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9035053B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2015-05-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Processes for making compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8846917B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8846918B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841337B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841449B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8841450B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2014-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
WO2013079566A3 (en) * 2011-11-30 2013-07-25 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Fungicidal n- bicycloalkyl and n-tricycloalkyl pyrazole - 4 - (thio) carboxamide derivatives
US9725414B2 (en) 2011-11-30 2017-08-08 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Fungicidal N-bicycloalkyl and N-tricycloalkyl pyrazole-4-(thio)carboxamide derivatives
US9409917B2 (en) 2012-01-20 2016-08-09 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
WO2013108227A1 (en) 2012-01-20 2013-07-25 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
US11110086B2 (en) 2012-04-05 2021-09-07 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase and combination therapies thereof
US10478430B2 (en) 2012-04-05 2019-11-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase and combination therapies thereof
WO2013186089A2 (en) 2012-06-14 2013-12-19 Basf Se Pesticidal methods using substituted 3-pyridyl thiazole compounds and derivatives for combating animal pests
WO2014053450A1 (en) 2012-10-02 2014-04-10 Bayer Cropscience Ag Heterocyclic compounds as pesticides
US9791456B2 (en) 2012-10-04 2017-10-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for measuring ATR inhibition mediated increases in DNA damage
US8912198B2 (en) 2012-10-16 2014-12-16 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9556169B2 (en) 2012-11-19 2017-01-31 Novartis Ag Compounds and compositions for the treatment of parasitic diseases
US9926314B2 (en) 2012-11-19 2018-03-27 Novartis Ag Compounds and compositions for the treatment of parasitic diseases
US8871754B2 (en) 2012-11-19 2014-10-28 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions for the treatment of parasitic diseases
US9340546B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2016-05-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9718827B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2017-08-01 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10787452B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2020-09-29 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9650381B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2017-05-16 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11370798B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2022-06-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11117900B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2021-09-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10392391B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2019-08-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9718774B2 (en) 2012-12-12 2017-08-01 Idorsia Pharmaceuticals Ltd Indole carboxamide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonist
US9556117B2 (en) 2012-12-18 2017-01-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Indole carboxamide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US9388197B2 (en) 2013-01-22 2016-07-12 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
WO2014115078A1 (en) * 2013-01-22 2014-07-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
KR20150107881A (en) * 2013-01-22 2015-09-23 액테리온 파마슈티칼 리미티드 Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
US9388198B2 (en) 2013-01-22 2016-07-12 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
KR102220847B1 (en) 2013-01-22 2021-02-26 이도르시아 파마슈티컬스 리미티드 Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
US9663519B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-05-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11485739B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2022-11-01 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10160760B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2018-12-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10815239B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2020-10-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
WO2015150300A1 (en) 2014-04-02 2015-10-08 Bayer Cropscience Ag N-(1-(hetero)aryl-1h-pyrazol-4-yl)-(hetero)arylamide derivatives and use thereof as pesticides
US10206877B2 (en) 2014-04-15 2019-02-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator mediated diseases
US9670215B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2017-06-06 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10093676B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2018-10-09 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10800781B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2020-10-13 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11179394B2 (en) 2014-06-17 2021-11-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of Chk1 and ATR inhibitors
US11464774B2 (en) 2015-09-30 2022-10-11 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of DNA damaging agents and ATR inhibitors
WO2017076825A1 (en) 2015-11-02 2017-05-11 H. Lundbeck A/S Inhibitor of the p2x7 receptor
US12102607B2 (en) 2017-12-12 2024-10-01 Dompe' Farmaceutici S.P.A. C5aR inhibitors for use in the treatment of chemotherapy-induced iatrogenic pain
US11834441B2 (en) 2019-12-06 2023-12-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted tetrahydrofurans as modulators of sodium channels
US11919887B2 (en) 2019-12-06 2024-03-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted tetrahydrofurans as modulators of sodium channels
US11827627B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2023-11-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated N-(hydroxyalkyl (hetero)aryl) tetrahydrofuran carboxamides as modulators of sodium channels

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20150005293A1 (en) 2015-01-01
AU2008275891B2 (en) 2013-10-10
CA2691507C (en) 2016-06-21
SI2178865T1 (en) 2015-11-30
JP2010533736A (en) 2010-10-28
KR20100032861A (en) 2010-03-26
CA2691507A1 (en) 2009-01-22
RS54303B1 (en) 2016-02-29
KR101593237B1 (en) 2016-02-12
KR20150118197A (en) 2015-10-21
NZ582057A (en) 2012-03-30
HK1142330A1 (en) 2010-12-03
CN101711245A (en) 2010-05-19
CO6251318A2 (en) 2011-02-21
PH12014501677A1 (en) 2015-08-03
DK2178865T3 (en) 2015-10-19
US20100292236A1 (en) 2010-11-18
IL202499A (en) 2017-05-29
EP2178865B1 (en) 2015-08-19
ZA200908447B (en) 2011-05-25
CN104844578A (en) 2015-08-19
PL2178865T3 (en) 2015-12-31
CN101711245B (en) 2015-03-25
HRP20151052T1 (en) 2015-11-06
UA105758C2 (en) 2014-06-25
ES2551095T3 (en) 2015-11-16
JP2014058545A (en) 2014-04-03
MY154668A (en) 2015-07-15
PT2178865E (en) 2015-11-16
JP5813734B2 (en) 2015-11-17
WO2009012482A3 (en) 2009-04-30
EP2178865A4 (en) 2011-03-16
CY1116809T1 (en) 2017-03-15
PH12014501677B1 (en) 2015-08-03
US9133204B2 (en) 2015-09-15
EA017250B1 (en) 2012-11-30
MX2009014159A (en) 2010-03-04
SG187396A1 (en) 2013-02-28
HUE026446T2 (en) 2016-05-30
EP2178865A2 (en) 2010-04-28
EA200971084A1 (en) 2010-04-30
CN104844578B (en) 2018-06-19
IL202499A0 (en) 2010-06-30
AU2008275891A1 (en) 2009-01-22
BRPI0813426A2 (en) 2014-12-23
HK1213879A1 (en) 2016-07-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
DK2178865T3 (en) 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
AU2008286946B2 (en) Heteroaryl amide analogues
US20120190680A1 (en) Heteroaryl Amide Analogues
US8580812B2 (en) Heteroaryl amide analogues as P2X7 antagonists
US8431593B2 (en) Heteroaryl amide derivatives
WO2009108551A2 (en) Heteroaryl amide analogues
Ihle et al. Heteroaryl amide analogues as P2X7 antagonists

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200880021346.2

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08796352

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008796352

Country of ref document: EP

Ref document number: 12009502379

Country of ref document: PH

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2691507

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 582057

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008275891

Country of ref document: AU

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20097026691

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2009121864

Country of ref document: EG

Ref document number: 2010517200

Country of ref document: JP

Ref document number: 200971084

Country of ref document: EA

Ref document number: MX/A/2009/014159

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 09146583

Country of ref document: CO

Ref document number: 7503/CHENP/2009

Country of ref document: IN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2008275891

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20080721

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PI 20095491

Country of ref document: MY

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12669308

Country of ref document: US

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12014501677

Country of ref document: PH

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0813426

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20091221

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: P-2015/0681

Country of ref document: RS